Aficio 470W SM PDF

B010
SERVICE MANUAL
001195MIU
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
®
SERVICE MANUAL
B010
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

B010
SERVICE MANUAL
001195MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
Rev. 02/2003
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B010 A070 LW410 AF470W 4700WD
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 9/2001 Original Printing
1 3/2002 Revised Pages
B010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-1

1.1 PREPARATION.........................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1
1.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-2
1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-2
1.1.4 POWER SOURCE............................................................................1-3
1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..................................................1-4
1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK......................................................................1-4
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................1-5
1.3 ROLL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................1-11
1.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-11
1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-12
1.4 HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................1-17
1.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-17
1.5 STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................1-20
1.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-20
1.6 ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...................................1-21
1.6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-21
1.7 I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................1-24
1.7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK....................................................................1-24
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1

2.1 PM TABLE.................................................................................................2-1
2.2 LUBRICATION POINTS ............................................................................2-3
2.2.1 FUSING SECTION ...........................................................................2-3
2.2.2 DEVELOPMENT SECTION..............................................................2-3
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 3-1

3.1 OPENING AND CLOSING THE MACHINE...............................................3-1
3.2 EXTERNAL COVERS ...............................................................................3-2
3.2.1 FRONT VIEW ...................................................................................3-2
3.2.2 REAR VIEW .....................................................................................3-2
SM i B010
3.3 SCANNER .................................................................................................3-3
3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL........................................................................3-3
3.3.2 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, ORIGINAL SET SENSOR,
ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ...........................................3-5
3.3.3 WHITE PLATEN ROLLER................................................................3-6
3.3.4 ORIGINAL UPPER TRANSPORT UNIT AND EXIT SENSOR .........3-7
3.3.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT ROLLER ..................................................3-8
3.3.6 CIS (CONTACT IMAGE SENSOR) ..................................................3-8
3.4 AROUND THE DRUM ...............................................................................3-9
3.4.1 VDB (VIDEO DRIVE BOARD) ..........................................................3-9
3.4.2 LPH (LED PRINT HEAD)..................................................................3-9
3.4.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE, GRID WIRE, WIRE CLEANER...........3-10
3.4.4. QUENCHING LAMPS.....................................................................3-11
3.5 DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT........................................................3-11
3.5.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................3-11
3.5.2 DEVELOPER..................................................................................3-12
3.5.3 BY-PASS FEED SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR.................3-13
3.5.4 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH ............................................................3-14
3.5.5 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR...................................................................3-14
3.5.6 DRUM UNIT, ID SENSOR, AND CLEANING BLADE ....................3-15
3.6 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-17
3.6.1 CUTTER UNIT................................................................................3-17
3.6.2 CUTTING SENSOR AND FEED EXIT ROLLER ............................3-18
3.6.3 ROLL TRAY....................................................................................3-19
3.6.4 PAPER FEED DRIVE MOTOR.......................................................3-21
3.6.5 FIRST FEED ROLLER AND CLUTCH ...........................................3-21
3.6.6 SECOND FEED ROLLER AND CLUTCH ......................................3-22
3.6.7 REGISTRATION MOTOR ..............................................................3-22
3.6.8 REGISTRATION CLUTCH .............................................................3-23
3.6.9 REGISTRATION ROLLER .............................................................3-23
3.7 TRANSFER UNIT....................................................................................3-24
3.7.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRES ......................3-24
3.7.2 TRANSPORT UNIT ........................................................................3-25
3.7.3 TRANSPORT BELTS .....................................................................3-26
3.8 FUSING SECTION ..................................................................................3-27
3.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-27
3.8.2 PAPER JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID/EXIT SENSOR .................3-29
3.8.3 FPDB (FUSING PRESSURE DRIVE BOARD)...............................3-29
3.8.4 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS/PRESSURE MOTORS ......................3-29
3.8.5 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ............................................3-30
3.8.6 THERMOFUSE/HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR ..............................3-30
3.8.7 FUSING CLEANING ROLLER .......................................................3-30
3.8.8 FUSING LAMPS .............................................................................3-31
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER ....................................3-32
3.8.10 FUSING DRIVE MOTOR..............................................................3-34
B010 ii SM
Rev. 06/2004
3.9 BOARDS .................................................................................................3-35

3.9.1 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) .......................................................3-35
3.9.2 IOB (INPUT OUTPUT BOARD), MCU (MAIN CONTROL UNIT)....3-35
3.9.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................3-36
3.9.4 HDD REPLACEMENT ....................................................................3-36
3.10 ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................3-37
3.10.1 CIS AND WHITE PLATEN ROLLER ADJUSTMENT ...................3-37
3.10.2 LPH ADJUSTMENT......................................................................3-38
3.10.3 IMAGE POSITION, MAGNIFICATION, MARGIN ADJ..................3-41
3.11 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE..........................................................3-47
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................................4-2
4.3 JAM CODE TABLE..................................................................................4-18
4.4 COVER OPEN.........................................................................................4-19
4.5 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART .........................................4-20
4.5.1 DATA FLOW IN 1-TO-1 COPY MODE ...........................................4-20
4.5.2 DATA FLOW IN REPEAT COPY MODE ........................................4-20
4.5.3 DATA FLOW IN SCANNING MODE...............................................4-21
4.5.4 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (A0 OR SMALLER).................4-21
4.5.5 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (LARGER THAN A0) ..............4-22
4.5.6 DATA FLOW IN TEST PATTERN PRINTING ................................4-22
4.6 IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING..............................................4-23
4.6.1 FLOW CHART ................................................................................4-23
4.6.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................4-24
4.6.3 PRINTING ......................................................................................4-26
SERVICE TABLES
5 SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 5-1
5.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADING........................................................................5-1
5.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 UPGRADING THE SCU FIRMWARE...............................................5-2
5.1.3 UPGRADING THE BICU FIRMWARE..............................................5-4
5.1.4 UPGRADING THE SCU AND BICU TOGETHER ............................5-5
5.1.5 UPGRADING THE AMDP FIRMWARE ............................................5-6
5.2 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE .................................................................5-7
5.2.1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETTINGS...........................................................5-7
5.2.2 INITIAL COPIER SETTINGS............................................................5-8
5.3 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES .......................................................5-10
5.3.1 ENTERING SP MODE....................................................................5-10
5.3.2 HOW TO USE THE SP MODE .......................................................5-11
5.4 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION ..............................................................5-13
5.5 SOFTWARE, SYSTEM AND COPY SETTING RESET ..........................5-14
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ......................................................................5-14
SM iii B010
Rev. 05/2002
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTING AND COPY SETTING (UP MODE) RESET ...5-14
5.6 PRINTING TEST PATTERNS .................................................................5-15
5.6.1 IMAGE PROCESSING TEST PATTERNS .....................................5-15
5.6.2 IMAGE DATA PATH TEST PATTERNS.........................................5-16
5.7 INPUT CHECK ........................................................................................5-17
5.8 OUTPUT CHECK ....................................................................................5-20
5.9 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES...........................................5-21
5.10 BICU and SCU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY………………..5-50
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................... 6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MACHINE LAYOUT..........................................................................6-1
6.1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...........................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-4
6.1.4 ORIGINAL/COPY PAPER PATHS ...................................................6-5
6.2 SCANNER .................................................................................................6-6
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-6
6.2.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION..........................................................6-7
6.2.3 ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM .......................................................6-7
6.2.4 ORIGINAL FEED SPEED.................................................................6-7
6.2.5 ORIGINAL TEMPORARY DELAY ....................................................6-8
6.2.6 SCANNING MECHANISM................................................................6-8
6.2.7 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY CORRECTION..........................................6-9
6.2.8 ORIGINAL EXIT SWITCHING MECHANISM ...................................6-9
6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-10
6.3.1 GENERAL IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW CHART ........................6-10
6.3.2 ORIGINAL MODES ........................................................................6-11
Overview.............................................................................................6-11
Text Mode...........................................................................................6-12
Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-13
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-14
Pale Mode...........................................................................................6-15
Generation ..........................................................................................6-16
Patched Original Mode .......................................................................6-17
Blue Line Mode...................................................................................6-18
Photo (Hard Tone) Mode ....................................................................6-19
6.3.3 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASURE ...................................................6-20
6.3.4 FOUR-VALUE ERROR DIFFUSION ..............................................6-21
6.3.5 MTF SETTINGS .............................................................................6-21
6.4 AROUND THE DRUM .............................................................................6-22
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-22
6.4.2 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................6-23
6.4.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................6-23
6.4.4 CORONA WIRE CLEANING ..........................................................6-23
6.4.5 CLEANING THE DRUM .................................................................6-24
6.4.6 COLLECTING USED TONER ........................................................6-25
6.4.7 QUENCHING..................................................................................6-26
B010 iv SM
Rev. 3/2002
6.4.8 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATERS................................................6-26
6.5 IMAGE WRITING ....................................................................................6-27
6.5.1 LED HEADS ...................................................................................6-27
6.6 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-28
6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-28
6.6.2 DEVELOPER CROSS-MIXING ......................................................6-29
6.6.3 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-30
Copying...............................................................................................6-30
Making ID Sensor Patterns .................................................................6-30
6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MECHANISM..........................................6-31
6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-31
6.6.6 ID SENSOR....................................................................................6-31
6.6.7 TONER END/NEAR-END CONTROL ............................................6-32
6.6.8 TONER END RECOVERY .............................................................6-33
6.6.9 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ........................................................6-34
6.6.10 DEVELOPMENT TIMING CHART................................................6-35
6.7 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION ....................................................6-36
6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-36
6.7.2 PAPER HOLDER............................................................................6-37
6.7.3 PAPER WIDTH AND MEDIA TYPE SETTINGS.............................6-38
6.7.4 ROLL TRAY FEED MECHANISM ..................................................6-38
6.7.5 BY-PASS FEED MECHANISM.......................................................6-39
6.7.6 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-39
6.7.7 CUTTING MECHANISM.................................................................6-40
6.7.8 PAPER ROLL REVERSAL .............................................................6-40
6.7.9 ROLL END DETECTION ................................................................6-41
6.7.10 CONDENSATION PREVENTION.................................................6-41
6.7.11 PAPER FEED TIMING CHART ....................................................6-42
6.8 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION ...................................6-43
6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-43
6.8.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION TIMING CONTROL....................6-43
6.8.3 PICK-OFF PAWL OPERATION......................................................6-44
6.9 PAPER TRANSPORT .............................................................................6-45
6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-45
6.10 FUSING UNIT........................................................................................6-46
6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-46
6.10.2 FUSING PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM ...........................6-48
6.10.3 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE CONTROL ...........................6-49
6.10.4 FUSING CONTROL SETTING TABEL.........................................6-52
6.10.5 HOT ROLLER CLEANING ...........................................................6-53
6.10.6 HOT ROLLER THERMOFUSE.....................................................6-53
6.10.7 FUSING UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM ............................................6-53
6.10.8 WRINKLE PREVENTION .............................................................6-54
6.11 PAPER EXIT .........................................................................................6-55
6.11.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-55
6.11.2 PAPER EXIT DRIVE.....................................................................6-55
6.11.3 PAPER EXIT ACCESS.................................................................6-55
6.11.4 SWITCHING EXITS......................................................................6-56
6.11.5 EXIT JAM DETECTION................................................................6-56
SM v B010
6.12 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................6-57
6.12.1 MCU .............................................................................................6-57
6.12.2 IPU................................................................................................6-59
6.12.3 IOB ...............................................................................................6-60
6.12.4 VDB ..............................................................................................6-60
6.12.5 RFDB............................................................................................6-60
6.12.6 FPDB ............................................................................................6-60
6.12.7 PSU ..............................................................................................6-61
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1 COPIER ENGINE .........................................................................................7-1
2 2ND ROLL TRAY (OPTION) ........................................................................7-4
3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ......................................................................7-5
4 MACHINE COMPONENTS ..........................................................................7-6
B010 vi SM
!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. If the Start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(the Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
1
1. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)

!CAUTION
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly
replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning concerning copyright

Many documents are copyrighted. Such documents may not be reproduced by
scanning or in any other form without the express permission of the copyright
holder.
2
Conventions in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means Lengthwise, SEF

☛ Refer to section number (Short Edge Feed)
See Core Tech Manual for
!
details
" Screw
# Connector
$ E-ring
% Clip ring
Sideways, LEF
(Long Edge Feed)
3
INSTALLATION B010
POSITION 1
TAB
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B010
POSITION 2
TAB
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B010
POSITION 3
TAB
TROUBLESHOOTING B010
POSITION 4
TAB
SERVICE TABLES B010
POSITION 5
TAB
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B010
POSITION 6
TAB
SPECIFICATIONS B010
POSITION 7
TAB
POSITION 8
TAB
INSTALLATION
PREPARATION
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
1.1 PREPARATION
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (59°F to 86°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 Lux (do not expose to direct
sunlight).
4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3 (approx. 700 cubic ft.)
Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour.
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.075 mg/m3
6. If the installation location is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as
follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to
high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater
in the winter.
7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.
8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong
vibration.
SM 1-1 B010
PREPARATION
1.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Back 450 mm
Left Right
400 mm 450 mm
Front 1,000 mm
B010I520.WMF
1. Front: 1,000 mm (39")

2. Back: 450 mm (18")
3. Right: 450 mm (18")
4. Left: 400 mm (16")
1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to back: Within 0.15 mm/1000 mm (0.006”/39.4”) of level

2. Right to left: Within 0.15 mm/1000 mm (0.006”/39.4”) of level
Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenter’s level.
B010 1-2 SM
PREPARATION
1.1.4 POWER SOURCE
Installation
The machine must be installed in a building /facility equipped with a protective
device such as a circuit breaker, as the machine relies on such devices for
protection against over-current and short circuits
1. Input Voltage Level: 120V, 60Hz

More than 20 A (for the U.S.A. version)
220 ~ 240V, 50/60Hz

More than 10 A (for the European version)
2. Permissible Voltage ± 10%
Fluctuation:
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

2) Avoid multi-wiring. A dedicated line is recommended.
4. The recommended wall receptacle follows the NEMA Plug Configuration

indicated below.
NEMA 5-20 R NEMA 5-20 P

Standard 20 Amp Standard 20 Amp
120 Volt Receptacle 120 Volt Plug
SM 1-3 B010
COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Description Q’ty
Paper Holder........................................................................... 4
Original Guide Tray................................................................. 1
Original Guide Tray Hinge – Right .......................................... 1
Original Guide Tray Hinge – Left............................................. 1
Upper Original Exit Guide ....................................................... 3
Upper Original Exit Guide Joint (B010-22, -27 only) ............... 2
Rear Original Tray................................................................... 3
Rear Copy Tray Guide - Large................................................ 1
Rear Copy Tray Guide - Small ................................................ 1
Rear Copy Tray....................................................................... 3
Rear Copy Tray Holder ........................................................... 3
Cushion - Rear Copy Tray Holder (B010-22, -27 only) ........... 3
Guide Mylar - Small ............................................................... 3
Guide Mylar - Large ................................................................ 1
Front Copy Tray ...................................................................... 1
Leveling Shoes ....................................................................... 4
Tapping Screw – M4 x 8 ......................................................... 6
Screw with Washer – M4 x 10................................................. 2
NECR (B010-17, -27 only) ...................................................... 1
Decal - Operation (B010-22, -27 only) .................................... 1
Decal - Paper Tray (B010-22, -27 only) .................................. 1
Decal - Toner Supply (B010-22, -27 only)............................... 1
Copy Instructions Guide (B010-17 only) ................................. 1
System Instructions (B010-17 only) ........................................ 1
B010 1-4 SM
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
NOTE: Since the installation procedure is not packed with the copier as an
accessory, always bring this manual with you.
[A]
[B]
B010I103.WMF B010I101.WMF
[E]
[C]
[D]
B010I107.WMF
CAUTION
Keep the power cord unplugged when starting the following procedure.
NOTE: 1) Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
2) Insert the leveling shoes [D] under the leveling feet [E], and level the
machine before starting the installation.
1. Unpack the machine box and place the copier onto a flat floor using lifting
equipment (a fork lift).
CAUTION
The machine weighs approximately 225 kg (496 LB). If a fork lift is not
available, at least 4 people, one on each corner of the machine, are
needed to lift it from the pallet.
2. Remove the upper original tray pack [B] from inside the upper unit.
3. Remove all strips of tape [A], [C] as shown above.
SM 1-5 B010
Rear View
[C]
[D] [C]
[E]
[B] [F]
[A]
[B]
B010I102.WMF
B010I104.WMF
[G]
[H] [K]
[L]
[I] [J]
[H]
[M] B010I111.WMF
B010I212.WMF
4. Pull out the upper tray [A] and remove strips of tape.
5. Take out the four paper holders [B]. Remove the tapes (x2 each).
6. At the rear, remove two shipping blocks [C] from the original junction gate.
7. Release the lock lever [D]. Open the original feed unit [E] and remove the
cushions and bubble pack [F].
8. At the front, remove the tapes [G], and then from the rear remove the shipping
blocks [H] and tape [I].
9. Open the exit cover [J] and junction gate unit [K], then pull the red ribbon [L] to
remove the protection sheet [M].
B010 1-6 SM
Installation
[A]
B010I108.WMF
[B] [C] B010I109.WMF
[F]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[D]
[H]
B010I203.WMF
B010I107.WMF
10. Open the upper unit [A] and remove two strips of tape [B] from the transfer
corona unit.
11. At the front, peel off three strips of tape, and take out the drum protection sheet
[C] by pulling out the red tape.
12. Open the toner hopper cover, remove the left exit tray [D], remove the strip of
tape [E] from the corona wire cleaner, then reinstall the exit tray ( x 2).
CAUTION
The tape is looped around the corona wire drive screw. To avoid
damaging the drive screw, gently peel the tape from the mylar or cut it
with scissors.
13. Place a level [F] in the middle of the guide plate as shown in the illustration.
Make the machine level by turning the bolts [G] on the machine’s four feet.
NOTE: The gap [H] must be less than 2 mm for the bolt to clear the 3rd roll
feeder (option) when the feeder is opened and closed.
SM 1-7 B010
[B] [A] [D]

[C]
[B]
[E]
B010I105.WMF
B010I106.WMF
[J]
[H]
[I]
[F]
B010I206.WMF
[G] B010I207.WMF
[K]
[L]
B010I208.WMF
14. Install the upper original tray [A] by using the original guide tray hinges [B] ( x
1 each).
15. Install the upper original exit guides [C], joints [D] and the rear original trays [E].
16. Adhere the cushions [F] to the rear copy tray holders [G].
17. Install the rear copy tray holders ( x 2 each) and insert the rear copy trays [H].
NOTE: The rear copy tray holders must be installed to cover the holes and the
bare section of the frame.
18. Attach the large rear copy tray guide [I] in the center, then attach the two small
rear copy tray guides on either side of the large guide.
19. Attach the small guide mylars [J]. The guide mylars should be on the rear copy
tray guide.
20. Hook the large guide mylar [K] on the rear center copy tray.
21. Attach the front copy tray [L].
B010 1-8 SM
[C]
Installation
[A]
[D]
[B]
B010I100.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
B010I110.WMF
[H]
22. Raise the upper unit [A] and open the toner hopper cover [B].
23. Remove the sheet [C] covering the developer entrance.
24. Pour 2.4 kg (1.2 kg x 2) of developer [D] into the development unit evenly
across its width, while rotating the knob [E] clockwise as shown.
25. Install the toner cartridge [F]. Refer to the decal attached on the left side of the
machine.
1) Shake the cartridge 5 to 10 times and insert it into the toner hopper.
2) Peel off the green tape [G] from right to left to expose the clear tape and
toner supply holes.
3) Rotate the knob [H] of the cartridge clockwise until it stops.
26. Close the toner hopper cover and upper unit.
SM 1-9 B010
[A]
[B]
B010I521.WMF
27. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.
28. Enter SP mode as follows:
1) Press the Clear Modes key ] .
2) Enter
3) Hold down Clear/Stop E for more than 3 seconds.
4) On the touch panel, press Copy SP.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make copies until after step 31 is performed and
SP3001-02 in step 32 is complete.
29. To initialize the developer, execute SP2801 (Developer Initial Setting). This
takes two minutes.
30. To initialize the drum, execute SP2923 002 (Drum Set Mode). This takes a few
seconds.
31. Open the upper unit [A], turn the pressure lever [B] to the right to push the
cleaning blade against the drum, then close the upper unit.
32. To initialize the ID sensor, execute SP3001 002. This takes a few seconds.
33. Set SP2924 (Developer Mixing) to “YES”.
34. Exit the SP mode and make copy samples.
B010 1-10 SM
ROLL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.3 ROLL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Positioning Pin .................................................................... 2
2. Screw – M4x6 ..................................................................... 4
3. Flat Harness (taped to right side of machine) ..................... 1
4. Hexagonal Tapping Screw with Flat Washer – M4 x 8........ 4
5. Screw with Spring Washer – M4 x 6 ................................... 1
6. Right Slide Rail ................................................................... 1
7. Left Slide Rail...................................................................... 1
8. Stepped Screw – M4........................................................... 4
9. Screw – M4 x 6 ................................................................... 16
10. Positioning Pins – (M4 x 4) ............................................... 2
11. Harness Clamp – FCW52 ................................................. 2
12. Harness Clamp – LWS-0511Z .......................................... 2
13. Harness Clamp – LWS-2111Z .......................................... 1
14. Tapping Bind Screw M3x6 ................................................ 4
15. Edging............................................................................... 1
16. Screw – M4x6 ................................................................... 6
17. Decal – Tray 3................................................................... 1
18. Paper Holder .................................................................... 2
19. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1
20. Decal – Operation (B340-27 only).................................... 1
21. Decal – Roll Feeder (B340-27 only).................................. 1
SM 1-11 B010
[C] [D]
[G]
[A]
[E]
[B] [F]
[J] [E]
B010I501.WMF
B010I502.WMF
[G]
[I]
[H] B010I503.WMF
CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
2. Before starting the installation, insert the leveling shoes under the leveling feet, and
level the machine.
3. The machine is very heavy. To avoid serious injury, make sure that you have a
sufficient number of people to assist, and use proper lifting equipment for lifting or
moving.
4. The feed tray is weighs 36 kg (80lbs) and requires at least two people to lift and install.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. Turn off the copier main switch.
2. Remove the following covers:
1) Right front [A] and rear [B] covers (4 screws, 6 screws).
2) Left front [C] and rear [D] covers (4 screws, 6 screws).
3) Rear covers [E] (9 screws).
3. Remove the lower cover [F] and two brackets [G] (2 screws each).
4. Remove the power supply unit [H] (4 screws, 16 connectors).
NOTE: Before removing the Line and Neutral bayonet connectors [I] from the
PSU, mark them “L” and “N” to prevent reversing their positions when they are
re-attached. “L” (Line) is on the right, and “N” (Neutral) is on the left.
5. Remove the toner collection bottle [J]
B010 1-12 SM
Installation
[C]
B010I505.WMF
[A, B] B010I504.WMF
[E]
[D] B010I506.WMF
B010I507.WMF
6. Install the right and left slide rails [A] ,[B] (2 stepped screws, 5 screws ea.
M4x6).
7. Install the positioning pins [C] in the center (threaded) hole on each slide rail.
8. Install the positioning pins [D] (2 screws ea. M4x6).
9. Install two harness clamps [E] (2 tapping bind screws ea. M3x6).
SM 1-13 B010
[C]
[A]
[B]
B010I509.WMF
B010I508.WMF
[H]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[G]
[I]
B010I510.WMF
B010I511.WMF
[G]
10. Install the harness clamp [A] and edging [B].

11. Install the connector [C] (4 hex. tapping screws M4 x 8 with flat washers).
12. Loosen the three screws that secure the drawer connector [D].
13. Remove the shipping material from the flat cable [E].
14. Install the 3rd roll feeder [F] on the slide rails, and fit it over the positioning pins
[G].
15. Use the four screws [H] (2 screws ea. M4 x 6) to attach the tray to the side rails
[I].
B010 1-14 SM
Installation
[A]
B010I513.WMF [A]
B010I514.WMF
Tray 1
[B]
Tray 2
B010I552.WMF
[B] [C] B010I551.WMF
16. Draw out the 3rd roll feeder and route the flat cable [A] as shown.
17. Loosen the positioning brackets [B] of the 3rd roll feeder (2 screws each).
18. Remove the plastic bags from the lock levers and push in the 3rd roll feeder
slowly.
19. Align the positioning bracket and the drawer connector [C] then secure them (2
screws each, 3 screws).
SM 1-15 B010
[F] [A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[A]
[G] B010I553.WMF
[I]
[H]
B010I517.WMF
20. Install the two harness clamps [A] and connect the cables [B], [C], [D], and [E].
NOTE: Be sure to clamp cable [C, E] as shown with the pre-installed clamp [F].
21. Secure the ground (earth) wire [G] (1 screw M4x6 with spring washer).
22. Reinstall the lower front cover [H] and attach the decal [I] (2 hex. tapping
screws M4x8 with flat washer).
23. Reinstall the power supply unit, toner collection bottle, and covers.
NOTE: Connect the “N” (Neutral) connector on the left and connect the “L”
(Line) connector on the right.
CAUTION
When you position the power supply unit for re-installation, make sure that
the flat ribbon cable is not pinched at the top right.
B010 1-16 SM
HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.4 HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. HDD .................................................................................... 1
2. DC Harness – Power Source .............................................. 1
3. DC Harness ........................................................................ 2
4. Harness Clamp ................................................................... 2
5. Philips Tapping Screw – M4 x 8.......................................... 2
6. Philips Tapping Screw – M3 x 8.......................................... 2
SM 1-17 B010
HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
B010I521A.WMF
[B]
B010I522.WMF
[C]
[B]
B010I524.WMF
B010I523.WMF
CAUTION
Unplug the power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the copier right and left rear covers ( x 9).

2. Remove the serial number decal from the HDD unit and attach it on the rear
frame, next to the machine’s serial number decal.
3. Remove 2 cushions from the HDD unit.
4. Install the HDD unit [A] onto the base plate ( x 2).
5. Connect the DC harnesses [B] ( x 1, x 2 ea.).
6. Connect the power source DC harnesses [C] ( x 3).
B010 1-18 SM
Rev. 3/2002 HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
1) Press ].
2) Enter
3) Hold down E for more than 3 seconds.
8. Enter 4960 015 (HDD Connection On/Off) and then press On.
9. Turn off the main switch and reassemble the machine.
⇒ 10. Please verify that SP Modes 4960-005 and 4960-006 have been set to “ON”
11. Select User Tools/Counter on the operation panel then press:
• System Settings
• Key Operator Tools
• Optional Hard Disk
• Installed, OK
SM 1-19 B010
STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.5 STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Description Q’ty
1. Stamp Board ....................................................................... 1
[B]
[A]
B010I204.WMF
CAUTION
Keep the power cord unplugged when doing the following procedure.
1. Remove the copier rear left cover ( x 5).

2. Install the stamp board [A] on the IPU board [B].
3. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.
1) Press ].
2) Enter
3) Hold down E for more than 3 seconds.
5. Enter 5137 (Stamp Function On/Off), and then press Enabled.
6. Reassemble the machine.
B010 1-20 SM
ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.6 ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
Description Q’ty
1. Base Frame ........................................................................ 2
2. Base Stay............................................................................ 2
3. Middle Frame ...................................................................... 2
4. Original Tray Stay ............................................................... 2
5. Original Tray ....................................................................... 1
6. Size Decal Sheet ............................................................... 1
7. Original Stopper .................................................................. 2
8. Original Guide ..................................................................... 2
9. Cap – Base Frame.............................................................. 2
10. Cap – Original Tray Stay .................................................. 2
11. Hexagonal Bolt – M8 x 40 ................................................. 12
12. Washer – 8 mm ................................................................ 20
13. Tapping Screw – M4 x 8 .................................................. 6
14. Hex Nut – M8 ................................................................... 8
15. Caster – φ40...................................................................... 2
16. Caster – φ40 Stopper ........................................................ 2
SM 1-21 B010
[E]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C] [B]
[A]
[C]
B010I301.WMF [A]
[H]
[G]
[H]
[F]
B010I302.WMF
1. Snap the casters [A, B] onto the base frames [C].

[A]: Caster – φ40 Stopper
[B]: Caster – φ40
2. Install the base stays [D] on the base frames (4 bolts, 4 washers).
3. Install the caps [E] on the base frame.
4. Install the middle frames [F] (4 bolts, 8 washers, 4 nuts).
5. Install the original tray stays [G] (4 bolts, 8 washers, 4 nuts).
6. Install the caps [H] on the original tray stays.
B010 1-22 SM
A1
Installation
A0
34"
36"
48" 44"
B010I305.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B010I303.WMF B010I304.WMF
7. Install the original tray [A] on the original tray stays ( x 6).
8. Attach the size decals (A1, A0, 34", 36", 44", 48").
9. Attach the original stoppers [B] and original guides [C].
SM 1-23 B010
I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.7 I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Description Q'ty
I/F Board Kit ............................................................................ 1
I/F Video Cable ....................................................................... 1
I/F Control Cable..................................................................... 1
Tapping screw - M4 x 8........................................................... 3
Tapping Screw - M3 x 8 .......................................................... 1
Harness Clamp ....................................................................... 2
Harness Clamp - Small ........................................................... 1
B010 1-24 SM
Rev. 4/2002 I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
!CAUTION
1. Remove the following covers.

• Left Rear Cover [A] (6 screws).
• Left Front Cover [B] (4 screws). [D]
• Rear Left Cover [C] (5 screws).
2. Remove the cover bracket [D]
(1 screw).
[C]
[B]
G068I101.WMF
[A]
3. Install the I/F board unit [E] on

the left frame (3 screws).
4. Connect the I/F Video cable
[F] to the I/F board and IPU
board [G] Using harness
clams [J].(1 screw each).
NOTE: Make sure the
connector is inserted [I]
completely.
⇒ 5. Install the wire saddle [H] and
connect the DC harness [I]
from the main frame to the I/F
board.
G068I103.WMF
SM 1-25 B010
6. Remove the small covers [A, B] from

the left rear and left front covers [C, D]
(2 screws each).
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C] G068I102.WMF
7. Install the following covers.

• Left Front Cover
• Left Rear Cover
• Rear Left Cover
8. Connect the I/F Ctl Cable [E] between I/F board
and printer controller.
[E]
G068I104.WMF
B010 1-26 SM
1.7.3 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Installation
[A]
1. Remove the right front cover [A] (5 screws).
2. Remove the small cover [B] (1screws)
and plate nut (2 screw).
3. Install the key counter holder [B] by
attaching it to the bracket
(2 screws, 1 connector).
4. Reinstall the right rear cover.
5. Instruct the key operator on how to enable
the Key Counter from inside User Tools.
(User Tools • System Setting • [B] [C]
Key Operator Tools • Key Counter Access)
NOTE: Please be sure to set the Key Operator Access
code so that only the authorized key operator is
able to change the system settings. Key Counter Connector
6. Change the following SP Mode settings:
SP5997: Optional Counter Unit

Select “x 1/10” or “x1” for the Key Counter unit.
The machine counter units are as follows:
-17 version machine: Feet, Yards or Meters (depending on SP5980 setting).
-27 version machine: Meters.
SP5120: Mode Clear Option Counter Removal

This SP determines what happens to the copy job settings (magnification,
density, etc.) when the Key Counter is removed or the paper supply runs out
midway through a job.
0: Yes (default): Job settings and job are cleared
1: Stand-by: Job settings are cleared after the job is completed
2: No: Job settings remain even after job is completed
SM 1-27 B010
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PM TABLE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: Amounts (K) in the PM Interval column indicate kilometers (1,000 meters).
Symbol key: I: Inspect, R: Replace, C: Clean, L: Lubricate, A: Adjust
Maintenance
Preventive
PM
Part Number Description Q’ty PM Comments
Interval
Original Feed
Original Feed / Exit Rollers 10K C Alcohol or water, dry cloth
Original Sensors 60K C Blower brush
Original Table 10K C Water, dry cloth
Optics
White Platen Roller 10K C Alcohol or water, dry cloth
Exposure Glass 10K C Water, glass cleaner
Development
Developer 2 40K R Replace if necessary.
Development Filter 1 20K R Replace if necessary.
*1
Development Roller Gear 1 200K R Replace if necessary
Cartridge Holder 10K C Blower brush, dry cloth.
Registration Upper Guide Plate 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Side Seals 10K I/C Dry cloth
*1
Development Unit Gears 10K L Silicone Grease G501.
Development Lower Casing 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Used Toner Bottle 10K I Empty used toner.
Cleaning
Cleaning Blade 1 30K R Replace if necessary.
Cleaning Entrance Seal 20K C Dry cloth.
Side Seals 20K C Dry cloth.
Pick-off Pawl 20K C Dry cloth.
Around the Drum
Charge Corona Wire 1 10K C/R Replace if necessary.
Corona Wire Cleaner Pad 1 10K R Replace.
Charge Corona Casing 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Grid Wire 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Transfer Corona Wire 1 10K C/R Clean with dry cloth. Replace if
necessary.
Separation Corona Wire 1 10K C/R Clean with dry cloth. Replace if
necessary.
T&S Corona Casing / Guide 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Quenching Lamp 20K C Dry cloth
ID Sensor 20K C Blower brush.
LPH (LED Print Heads) 10K C Dry cloth. No chemical cleaners.
After wiping, touch to discharge
static.
*1
: See 2.2 Lubrication points.
SM 2-1 B010
PM TABLE
PM
Part Number Description Q’ty PM Comment
Interval
Paper Feed
Cutter Unit 1 10K C Replace if necessary (approx.
service life: 12K cuts)
Paper Feed / Exit Rollers 10K C Alcohol, dry cloth
Cutting Sensor 20K C Blower brush
Registration Rollers 10K C Alcohol, dry cloth
Registration Sensor 20K C Blower brush
Transport Belt 10K C Alcohol, dry cloth
Timing Belt 10K I Adjust tension if necessary.
Fusing Unit
Hot Roller 1 30K R Replace if necessary.
Fusing Cleaning Roller 1 30K R Always replace these parts
Bushing – Hot Roller 2 30K R together.
Pressure Roller 1 30K R Replace if necessary.
Hot Roller Stripper 10K C Dry cloth.
Pressure Roller Stripper 10K C Dry cloth.
Thermistor 30K C Dry cloth.
Fusing Exit Guide Plate 10K C Alcohol, dry cloth.
2
Fusing Unit Gears* 120K L Barrieta JFE 55/2
2
Fusing Pressure Screw Shaft* 40K L Barrieta JFE 55/2
Fusing Drive Gears 10K L Silicone Grease G501
Exit Turn Guide 10K C Damp cloth, then dry cloth.
Paper Exit Sensor 10K C Blower brush
Exit Rollers 20K C Alcohol, dry cloth
Others
Ozone Filter 1 10K R Replace.
*2
: See 2.2 Lubrication points.
B010 2-2 SM
LUBRICATION POINTS
2.2 LUBRICATION POINTS

2.2.1 FUSING SECTION
[A]
[C]
Maintenance
Preventive
B010P506.WMF
[B]
[C]
B010P507.WMF
[A]: Fusing Gears (Barrieta JFE 55/2)

[B]: Fusing Drive Gears (Silicone Grease G501)
[C]: Fusing Pressure Screw Shaft (Barrieta JFE 55/2)
2.2.2 DEVELOPMENT SECTION

[B]
[A, B] Development Unit Gears
(Silicone Grease G501)
NOTE: Development Roller Gear [A] [A]
should be checked every 200 km
and replaced if necessary.
B010P303.WMF
SM 2-3 B010
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
OPENING AND CLOSING THE MACHINE
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

WARNING
Before you attempt any procedure described in this section, always switch
off the main power switch on the machine and disconnect the machine
from the power source.
3.1 OPENING AND CLOSING THE MACHINE

[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[F]
and
[C] [E]
[B]
[D]
B010R912.WMF
[A]: Operation panel release

CAUTION: To close the operation panel, always press down evenly on both
sides.
[B]: Upper unit releases
CAUTION: To avoid bending the catch and release mechanisms, always
release and raise the right and left sides together.
[C]: Hopper cover
[D]: Roll tray release
[E]: Paper exit cover
[F]: Paper exit guide plate
SM 3-1 B010
EXTERNAL COVERS
3.2 EXTERNAL COVERS

3.2.1 FRONT VIEW
[C]
[H]
[D] [I]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[F] [B] B010R701.WMF
[A]: Right rear cover ( x 6) [F]: Right inner cover ( x 2)

[B]: Right front cover ( x 4) [G]: By-pass feed table ( x 4)
[C]: Left rear cover ( x 6) [H]: Left upper unit cover ( x 2)
[D]: Left front cover ( x 4) [I]: Right upper unit cover ( x 2)
[E]: Left inner cover ( x 1)
NOTE: Always remove the left and right covers together, the rear cover first and
then the front cover. To avoid scratching the paint on the covers, always
re-attach the front cover first and then the back cover.
3.2.2 REAR VIEW

[A]: Rear right cover ( x 5)
[B]: Rear left cover ( x 5)
[B]
[A]
B010R906.WMF
B010 3-2 SM
SCANNER
3.3 SCANNER
3.3.1 OPERATION PANEL
[A]: Original roll take-up ( x 2, bracket x 2)
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B010R006.WMF
[A]: Left original guide plate ( x 1)

[B]: Right original guide plate ( x 1)
[C]: Operation panel front plate ( x 4)
[C]
[A]
[B] B010R911.WMF
SM 3-3 B010
SCANNER
[B]
Open the operation panel unit.

[A]: Lower sensor cover ( x 4)
[B]: Operation panel ( x 4, x 2)
[C]: Upper scanner cover ( x 6) [C]
[A]
B010R007.WMF
[A]: Scanner stop switch ( x 2, x 1)

[B]: Operation switch ( x 2, x 1)
[B]
[A]
B010R008.WMF
B010 3-4 SM
SCANNER
3.3.2 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS, ORIGINAL SET SENSOR,

ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR
Raise the operation panel unit.
Left, right original guide plates ( x 2) ( 3.3.1)
[A]: Operation panel lower cover ( x 4)
[B]: Original path upper bracket ( x 2)
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[A]
and
B010R001.WMF

[A]: Clamp
Original registration sensor

1
Original set sensor A*
(A4 Lengthwise)
Original size sensor B
(A3 Lengthwise)
Original size sensor C
(A2 Lengthwise)
Original size sensor D
(A1 Lengthwise)
Original size sensor E B010R002.WMF
(A0 Lengthwise)
*1 [A]
US paper sizes.
SM 3-5 B010
SCANNER Rev. 3/2002
3.3.3 WHITE PLATEN ROLLER [A]

[A]: Raise the operation panel unit [B]
[B]: Left operation panel unit cover ( x 2)
[C]: Right operation panel unit cover ( x
2)
[D]: Original table ( x 4)
[D]
B010R003.WMF
[C]
[A]
[A]: Door switch bracket ( x 1)

[B]: Original transport guide ( x 4)
[B]
B010R004.WMF
[A]
[A]: Remove.
[B]: Loosen but do not remove.
[C]: White platen roller.
• Press the white platen roller out to [B]
the left to remove it.
• Lift straight out to prevent the
stopper or gear from dropping off [C]
either end.
• Before re-installation, make sure B010R005.WMF
the stopper on the left end of the

white platen roller is snug, inside
the roller.
SP Adjustment Required After Replacement
⇒ SP4428 002
Image Scan Adjustment (see
section 3.10.1)
NOTE: When re-installing, set the right end of the white platen roller first.
B010 3-6 SM
SCANNER
3.3.4 ORIGINAL UPPER TRANSPORT UNIT AND EXIT SENSOR

Original roll take-up, operation panel, [A]
upper scanner cover, lower sensor cover
(see section 3.3.1) [B]
Lower the operation panel frame.
[A]: Upper original transport unit ( x 2,
x 1)
[B]: CIS cover ( x 7)
Replacement
Adjustment
B010R009.WMF
and
[A]: Original exit unit cover ( x 2) [A]
[B]: Original exit sensor ( x 1)
[B]
B010R010.WMF
NOTE: When you re-install the upper

original transport unit, make sure
that the paper turn guide is below [A]
the pin of the unit below [A].
B010R567.WMF
SM 3-7 B010
SCANNER Rev. 3/2002
3.3.5 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT ROLLER
⇒Upper original transport unit ( 3.3.4)

[A]
[A]: Original transport roller ( x 4)
B010R011.WMF
3.3.6 CIS (CONTACT IMAGE SENSOR)
[A]
⇒ Upper original transport unit ( 3.3.4)
CIS cover ( x 2)
[A]: CIS unit ( x 2, x 3)
⇒ SP4428 002
Image Scan Adjustment (see
section 3.10.1)
B010R012.WMF
B010 3-8 SM
Rev. 3/2002 AROUND THE DRUM
3.4 AROUND THE DRUM

3.4.1 VDB (VIDEO DRIVE BOARD)
[C]
Open the upper unit, and remove the exit tray
if it is attached.
[A]: Left copy tray ( x 2)
[B]: Right copy tray ( x 2) [A]
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the pawls on
the bottom of the covers, hold the cover level
as you pull it straight out.
[C]: VDB ( x 7, x 7)
Replacement
Adjustment
B010R101.WMF
and
[B]
3.4.2 LPH (LED PRINT HEAD) [E] [A]
Remove the exit tray if it is attached.

Open the upper unit.
Remove the left and right copy trays
⇒ ( .3.4.1)
Remove the left and right upper unit covers. B010R555.WMF
[B]
( 3.2)
{|
[A]: LPH connectors on VDB ( x 4) }
[B]: Grounding wire ( x1)
[C]: Grounding wire (loosen x1)
[D]: LPH ~ [D]
[E]: Three ROMs.
• If you intend to replace the LPH, you

must replace the ROMS on the VDB with
the three ROMs provided with the new
LPH kit.
[C]
• Reading top to bottom on the board, the
B010R102.WMF
ROMs are marked LPH-L (left), LPH-C
(center), and LPH-R (right).
• To confirm that each new ROM is
installed in the correct position, match
the numbers of the new ROMs with the
numbers printed on the labels of the LPH
unit.
• Perform an IPU Test Pattern print to
confirm that the joints of the LPH are
⇒ aligned correctly and then adjust if necessary. ( 3.10.2)
SM 3-9 B010
AROUND THE DRUM Rev. 3/2002
3.4.3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE, GRID WIRE, WIRE CLEANER
⇒ LPH ( 3.4.2)
[A]: Wire cleaner drive motor [A]
bracket ( x 2) [B]
[B]: Remove the white plastic [C]
coupling from the drive screw.
CAUTION: To avoid losing this
coupling, always remove it before
removing the charge corona unit.
[C]: Left, right grounding plate
springs ( x 2)
[D]: Charge corona unit
SP Adjustment Required After
Replacement
[D]
B010R550.WMF
SP2803 Charge Corona Wire Cleaning
NOTE: 1) When removing this unit, shift the unit to the right and lift the left part of
the unit up.
2) Confirm that the grounding plate edge is securely set in the holes.
[A]: Grid wire [D] [B] [A]
[B]: Right cover [C]
[C]: Left cover
[D]: Charge corona wire
[E]: Shock absorbers
[A]: Charge corona wire cleaner [E] B010R104.WMF

[A]
SP2803 Charge Corona Wire Cleaning
When replacing wires:

• Make sure the grid wires are correctly
positioned in the correct slots and not
crossed.
• If replacing wires, hold them by the B010R105.WMF
ends. Oil from hands could cause
uneven charge on the drum.
• Handle wires carefully. Never bend or stretch them.
B010 3-10 SM
Rev. 4/2002 DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.4.4 QUENCHING LAMPS

Charge corona unit (☛ 3.4.3) [A]
[A]: Lamp bracket, left (! x 2, " x 1)
[B]: Lamp bracket, right (! x 2, " x 1)
[C]: Quenching lamp arrays(" x 2)
[C]
[B] B010R106.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
3.5 DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
and
3.5.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT [A]
[A]: Left upper unit cover (! x 2)
[B]: Right upper unit cover (! x 2)
⇒ [C]: Right inner cover (! x 2)
[D]: Lower toner cartridge cover.
(Slides out, no screws need to
be removed.) [B]
[D]
[C] B010R301X.WMF
CAUTION: The development unit weighs

10.4 kg (22.9 lb.) with the toner cartridge
installed, or 8 kg (17.6 lb.) without the
toner cartridge.
Raise the upper unit.
[A]: Development bias connector (" x 1)
Make sure the upper unit is open. Do not
attempt to remove the development unit
with the unit closed.
[B]: Development unit (! x 6, " x 1)
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the fragile
wings on either end of the development
unit, never attempt to remove or install the [A]
[B]
development unit in the machine with the
upper unit closed.
B010R302.WMF
SM 3-11 B010
DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
3.5.2 DEVELOPER
Remove the toner cartridge (follow the
instructions on the decal on the front left
side of the machine.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the bias terminal on
the left end of the development unit, [A]
handle it carefully.
[A]: Toner supply casing ( x 2)
[B]: Development filter and bracket.
NOTE: Make sure that the filter is re-installed
with the holes facing down. [B]
[A] B010R918.WMF
[A]: Raise the clutch-end up about 45o to

remove the developer, and then lay to
flat.
B010R919.WMF
[A]
[A]: Rotate the unit to remove more developer.

[B]: Rotate the knob to remove the remaining
developer.
SP2801 Developer Initial Setting
SP3001 002 ID Sensor Initial Setting [B]
B010R920.WMF
B010 3-12 SM
3.5.3 BY-PASS FEED SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR

[A] [E]
⇒ [A]: Development unit ( 3.5.1)
[B]: Registration bracket ( x 2)
[C]: Registration guide ( x 2)
[D]: By-pass feed sensor
[E]: Registration sensor
[D]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustment
[C] B010R304.WMF
and
SM 3-13 B010
DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT Rev. 3/2002
3.5.4 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH

[C]
⇒ [A]: Development unit ( 3.5.1)
[B]: Toner supply clutch ( x 1, x 1,
bushing x1, bracket x 1) [B]
[C]: Impeller
NOTE: After re-installing the toner supply [D]
clutch, make sure that the clutch pin is
inserted correctly in the slot [D] of the [A]
hopper. If not inserted correctly, the B010R305.WMF
rotating clutch could damage the clutch
cable.
3.5.5 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR
Left covers. ( 3.2.1)

[A]: Drum drive motor ( x 4, x 1)
[A] B010R303.WMF
B010 3-14 SM
3.5.6 DRUM UNIT, ID SENSOR, AND CLEANING BLADE
⇒ Development unit ( 3.5.1) [A]

To the right of the drum drive gear, loosen
the screw to relieve the tension on the
drive belt. [B]
[A]: Drum drive gear and belt ( x1, use
a hex wrench)
[B]: ID sensor connector ( x 1)
[C]: Left drum bracket ( x 2)
[D]: Right drum bracket ( x 2)
[E]: OPC drum assembly
NOTE: Cover the OPC with a sheet
Replacement
Adjustment
of paper to protect it from [C] [E]
and
light. [D] B010R201.WMF
[D]
[A]: Drum unit left side ( x 1, spring x 1,
bushing x 1) [C]
[B]: Drum unit right side ( x 1, spring x
[A]
1, bushing x 1)
[C]: OPC drum
[D]: Rubber plates
When installing a new drum, remove [F]
both rubber plates inside the old
drum and install them in the new
drum. (These plates reduce the
noise caused by inertia when the [E]
drum starts and stops.)
[E]: ID Sensor ( x 1, x 1) B010R202.WMF
[B]
[F]: Pick-off pawl solenoid ( x 1, x 1)
SP Adjustment Required After Drum Replacement
Drum Set Mode (see the next
SP2923
page)
SP3001 002 ID Sensor Setting – Initial
Setting
SM 3-15 B010
DRUM AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT
[A]: Cleaning blade ( x 2) [A]
SP Adjustment Required After Cleaning Blade B010R203.WMF
Replacement
SP2923 002 Drum Set Mode – Execute
Drum Set Mode

Make sure that the drum protection sheet is
removed.
1. Set the pressure lever [A] to the left.
2. Plug in the power cable and switch the
main power switch on.
3. Press ]. [A]
4. Enter
5. Hold down E for more than 3 seconds.
6. On the touch panel, press Copy SP.
7. Enter 2923, press , then press Start
to execute Drum Set Mode.
B010R570.WMF
8. After it has finished, set the pressure

lever [A] to the right.
9. If you have replaced the OPC drum, enter 3001 002, press , then press Start
to initialize the ID sensor.
B010 3-16 SM
PAPER FEED
3.6 PAPER FEED

3.6.1 CUTTER UNIT
[A]: Roll tray cover ( x 2)
[B]
[B]: Loosen side plate ( x 2).
[C]: Guide plate (pressure release). [C]
[A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
B010R708.WMF
[E]
[A]: Left cutter HP switch connector [A]

( x 1)
[B]: Left spring, hook ( x 1) [C]
[C]: Side plate ( x 2)
[D]: Right cutter HP switch connector [B]
( x 1)
[E]: Cutter motor connector ( x 1, [F]
clamps x 2)
[D]
[F]: Cutter unit ( x 2). (Slide out to
the left.)
B010R709.WMF
SM 3-17 B010
PAPER FEED Rev. 3/2002
3.6.2 CUTTING SENSOR AND FEED EXIT ROLLER
[A]: Lock plate ( x 2)

[B]: Sensor bracket [C]
[C]: Cutting sensor ( x 1, x 1)
[A]
[B]
B010R715.WMF
[E]
Left inner cover. ( 3.6.3)

⇒ Right inner cover. (Raise out of position [F]
without disconnecting cable.) ( 3.6.3)
[D]: Bushings ( x 2)
[E]: Guide plate ( x 4)
[F]: Feed exit roller
NOTE: Re-install the left end first
(viewed from the front.)
[D]
B010R714.WMF
B010 3-18 SM
Rev. 3/2002 PAPER FEED
3.6.3 ROLL TRAY
CAUTION
The roll tray weighs 36 kg (80 lb.) At least two technicians are needed to
remove it and re-install lit.
Before removing the roll tray, prepare a clean flat surface to set the unit on after
removal. As the paper feed motor is mounted under the roll tray, a strong table, or
four blocks, to raise the roll tray slightly, is ideal and will make it easier to service.
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustment
Right covers ( 3.2.1)
and
[A]: Rear right cover ( x 5)
[B]: Open the harness clamps x 3 [D]
[C]: Connectors ( x 2)
⇒ [D]: PSU ( 3.9.1)
[A]
B010R551.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]: Left inner cover ( x 3)
[B]: Right inner cover ( x 2)
[C]: Harness clamp at the corner of the
right inner cover.
[C]
B010R707.WMF
SM 3-19 B010
PAPER FEED
[A]: Harness clamps inside the machine (x 2)
[A]
B010I513.WMF
[A]
[A]: Roll tray ( x 4 with washers)
Do not remove the stainless steel
spotting screws on either side of the roll
tray.
[B]: Pull the connector from the back to the
front of the machine. Coil it and then
place it inside the roll tray.
With a technician on either side of the
roll tray, lift it off the rail and set it down [B]
on a clean flat surface. The roll tray
weighs about 32 kg (70.5 lb.) B010R711.WMF
B010 3-20 SM
PAPER FEED
3.6.4 PAPER FEED DRIVE MOTOR

The paper feed drive motor is located under the front left corner of the roll tray.
Roll tray [B]

Left inner cover ( x 3) [A]
[A]: Paper feed drive cover, left rear
corner ( x 1)
[B]: Loosen adjustment screw.
[C]: Remove pressure spring
[D]: Motor assembly ( x 1, x 2
top, x 2 side)
[E]: Paper feed motor ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]
[C]
and
B010R712.WMF
[E]
3.6.5 FIRST FEED ROLLER AND CLUTCH

[B] [C]
Roll tray
[A]: Bushings ( x 2)
[B]: First feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Paper feed clutch ( x 1, clamps x
2)
Adjustment Required After
Replacement [A]
Adjust the cut length.
SP1920-001 ~ Cut Length Adjustment

081
SP1921-001 ~ Cut Length Adjustment B010R716.WMF
025 [A]
SM 3-21 B010
PAPER FEED
3.6.6 SECOND FEED ROLLER AND CLUTCH

[C]
Roll tray [A]
[B]
[A]: Bushings ( x 2)
[B]: Second feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Paper feed clutch ( x 1, clamps x
2)
Adjustment Required After
Replacement [A]
Adjust the cut length.
SP1920-001 ~ Cut Length Adjustment

081
SP1921-001 ~ Cut Length Adjustment B010R713.WMF
025
3.6.7 REGISTRATION MOTOR

Main machine left covers ( 3.2.1) [B]
Top cover plate ( x 1)
[A]: Open clamps
[B]: Registration motor bracket ( x 3,
x 3)
[C]: Registration motor ( x 4)
[C]
[A]
B010R915.WMF
B010 3-22 SM
Rev. 3/2002 PAPER FEED
3.6.8 REGISTRATION CLUTCH

⇒ Registration motor ( 3.6.7)
[A]: Stopper bracket ( x 1)
[B]: Registration clutch
NOTE: Use the flat head of a small
screwdriver to release the lock [A]
on the clutch.
[B] B010R904.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3.6.9 REGISTRATION ROLLER
Left and right covers, By-pass feed table ( 3.2.1)
[C]
⇒ Registration motor ( 3.6.7)
Registration clutch ( 3.6.8) [D]
[A]: Cover plate ( x 2)
[B]: T&S power pack ( x 2, x 1)
[C]: Torque limiter bracket ( x 2) [B]
[D]: Torque limiter ( x 1)
[A]
B010R910.WMF
[C]
[A]: Guide plate ( x 4)
[B]: Aluminum guide plate ( x 4)
NOTE: Hold the plate level as you pull it out
so the plastic flaps do not fall from
either end.
[C]: Registration roller ( x 2, bushings x 2)
[A]
[B] B010R905.WMF
SM 3-23 B010
TRANSFER UNIT Rev. 3/2002
3.7 TRANSFER UNIT

⇒ 3.7.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRES
Front cover ( 3.2.1) [A]
Right inner cover plate ( 3.2.1)
[C]
[A]
[A]: Loosen (do not remove) ( x 2)
[B]: T&S corona unit connectors ( x2)
CAUTION: Remove the T&S corona unit
carefully to avoid touching or scratching
the OPC drum above.
[C]: T&S corona unit. (Hold at both ends [B]
and lift carefully.)
[D]: Paper Guide
B010R702.WMF
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]: End block covers [A]
[B]: Insulator plates (x 4)
[C]: Transfer and separation wires
NOTE: The single wire at the front and
double wire at the back are both
spring loaded on the left.
When replacing wires:

• Make sure the wires are correctly B010R703.WMF
positioned in the correct slots and not
crossed.
• If replacing wires, hold them by the ends. Oil from hands could cause uneven
charge on the drum.
• Handle wires carefully. Never bend or stretch them.
B010 3-24 SM
Rev. 3/2002 TRANSFER UNIT
3.7.2 TRANSPORT UNIT

Drum drive motor ( 3.5.5)
⇒ Fusing drive motor ( 3.8.10) [A]
Fusing unit ( 3.8.1)
[A]: Duct vent ( x 2)
[B]: Internal duct. Push left and then right
to disconnect.
[C]: Transport unit ( x 4, x 2)
CAUTION [B]
[C] B010R704.WMF
When disconnecting the connectors
Replacement
Adjustment
from the transport unit, avoid
touching or hitting the sharp
and
stripping pawls above the transport
unit.
SM 3-25 B010
TRANSFER UNIT
3.7.3 TRANSPORT BELTS
[A]: Guide plate ( x 2)

[A]
[B]: Left transport fan motor ( x 2)
[C]: Right transport fan motor ( x 2)
[B]
[C] B010R705.WMF
[E] [D] [C]

[A]: Arm bushings ( x 3)
[B]: Bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Bushings x 2
[D]: Drive gear
[E]: Drive shaft
[F]: Transport belts
[B]
[C]
[F]
B010R706.WMF
[A]
B010 3-26 SM
FUSING SECTION
3.8 FUSING SECTION

3.8.1 FUSING UNIT
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, before removing the fusing unit, switch
off the main power, unplug the machine from its power source, and allow
the fusing unit to cool.
[C]
[A]: Fusing lower cover ( x 2) [D]
[B]: Connector ( x 1)
[C]: Grounding wire ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
[D]: Paper exit cover (hinges x 2) [B]
and
[D]
[A]
B010R501.WMF
[A]
[A]: Grounding wire ( x1)

[B]: Paper exit guide plate (hinges x 2)
[B]
B010R503.WMF
SM 3-27 B010
FUSING SECTION Rev. 3/2002
NOTE: Mark the large bayonet

connectors before you disconnect
them so you can re-connect them in
the correct order.
[A]: Left connectors ( x 4)
[B]: Right connectors ( x 5)
⇒ [C]: Fusing unit ground ( x 1)
CAUTION:
• The fusing unit is heavy, about 14 kg (31 [A]
lb.) Grasp it carefully at both ends when [B] B010R505.WMF
[C]
you remove it from the machine, and
place it on a flat clean surface.
• Re-install the fusing unit carefully to avoid
hitting the PCBs as the fusing unit passes
over them.
B010 3-28 SM
FUSING SECTION
3.8.2 PAPER JUNCTION GATE SOLENOID/EXIT SENSOR
[E] [F] [D]

[C]
[A]: Grounding wire ( x 1) [A]
[B]: Spring [B]
[C]: Solenoid arm
[D]: Guide plate ( x 4)
[E]: Solenoid ( x 2)
[F]: Exit sensor ( x 1, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
B010R502.WMF
and
3.8.3 FPDB (FUSING PRESSURE DRIVE BOARD)
[A]: Right FPDB ( x 2, standoffs x 3)

[B]: Left FPDB ( x 2, standoffs x 3)
[A]
B010R504.WMF
[B]
3.8.4 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS/PRESSURE MOTORS [E] [D]
Hot roller strippers

[A]: Hot roller stripper bracket ( x 4)
[B]: Hot roller strippers
Right motor [A]
[C]: Pressure spring
[D]: Pressure motor/bracket assembly
( x 2)
[B]
[E]: Pressure motor ( x 2, x 1)
Left motor
Repeat [C], [D], [E] for the left motor.
B010R506.WMF
[C]
SM 3-29 B010
FUSING SECTION
3.8.5 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR
[A]: Thermistor bracket ( x 1)

[B]: Open clamp
[C]: Thermistor
[C]
[B]
[A]
B010R507.WMF
3.8.6 THERMOFUSE/HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR

[C]
[A]: Thermofuse bracket ( x 1)

[B]: Thermofuse ( x 2)
[C]: Thermistor ( x1, x1)
[B]
[A]
B010R508.WMF
3.8.7 FUSING CLEANING ROLLER

[B]
[C]
[A]: Cleaning roller assembly ( x 4)
[B]: Bushings ( x 2) [A] [B]
[C]: Fusing cleaning roller
B010R509.WMF
B010 3-30 SM
Rev. 3/2002 FUSING SECTION
3.8.8 FUSING LAMPS

⇒ Cleaning roller assembly ( 3.8.7)
Left end of fusing lamp
[B]
[A]: Fusing lamp harness ( x 2)
[B]: Fusing lamp cover ( x 2)
[C]: Left fusing lamp bracket ( x 1)
Rotate the rubber cushions until
the cutout faces down, then [C]
[A]
remove the harnesses from the
bracket.
B010R510.WMF
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[B]
Right end of fusing lamp
[A]: Open clamps x 4
[B]: Fusing lamp cover ( x 1) [C] [A]
[C]: Fusing lamp bracket ( x 1)
[D]: Turn the rubber cushion until the
cutout faces down, then remove
the harnesses from the bracket.
[E]: Fusing lamps
NOTE: After the lamps are re- [D]
installed, make sure that the
rubber cushions are rotated B010R511.WMF [E]
so the slits are facing up to
prevent the lamps from slipping out.
SM 3-31 B010
FUSING SECTION Rev. 3/2002
3.8.9 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER
[C]
⇒ Fusing lamps ( 3.8.8) [D]
[B]
[A]: Wire clamp
[B]: Gear [A]
[C]
[C]: Hot roller bushings
[D]: Hot roller
B010R512.WMF
[B]
⇒ Fusing cleaning roller ( 3.8.7)
Hot roller strippers ( 3.8.4)
[C]
[A]: Fusing entrance guide ( x 1)
[B]: Pressure plate ( x 1)
[C]: Bushings
[D]: Pressure roller
[A]
[C]
[D]
B010R513.WMF
B010 3-32 SM
FUSING SECTION
After Replacing Hot Roller or

Pressure Roller [C]
Rough Adjustment
1. Execute SP1914 001 (set to On) to
ensure that the pressure motors [A]
are at the home position. [A]
2. Measure the length of the spring [B]
with calipers.
Correct spring length:
[B]
Outside 28.8± 0.3 mm
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. If the spring length is longer or
shorter than the correct
measurement, adjust the position of B010R917.WMF
the home position sensor [C].

Move sensor: To make the spring:
Toward the motor Longer
Away from the motor Shorter
4. Measure the spring length again with calipers to confirm that it is correct.
Fine Adjustment
During normal operation the spring, bracket, and sensor move out of the home
position to the correct position determined by automatic software calculations for
the paper type, fusing mode setting, and fusing roller temperature.
The following SP codes can be used to select the pressure control correction
settings if skewing occurs after changing the paper length selection.
SP1914 002 Right Pressure Adjustment

SP1914 003 Left Pressure Adjustment
Changing these SP codes does not change the position of the bracket and sensor
immediately after adjustment. The position is adjusted only during copying.
If these SP codes are adjusted, the settings must be the same size but of opposite
sign
(Example: Right Pressure +1 / Left Pressure –1)
SM 3-33 B010
FUSING SECTION
3.8.10 FUSING DRIVE MOTOR

[D]
Main unit left covers ( 3.2) [B]
Left inner cover ( 3.2)
[A]: Spring x 1
[B]: Fusing drive motor unit ( x 3,
x 1)
[C]: Fusing drive motor ( x 4)
NOTE: When re-installing the
fusing drive motor, make
sure that the drive shaft is
correctly engaged with the
timing belt [D]. [C]
[A] B010R559.WMF
B010 3-34 SM
Rev. 06/2004 BOARDS
3.9 BOARDS
3.9.1 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT)
Left covers ( 3.1.2)
[A]: PSU ( x 4, x all)
NOTE:
• Before removing the Neutral and Line
bayonet connectors [B], mark them “N”
and “L” before you remove them so you
can match them with the N (left) and L
(right) notations on the board when you
re-connect them.
Replacement
Adjustment
• If a copy tray support has been installed
and
below the board, you may need to
remove it in order to remove all the
screws from the PSU board. [A]
B010R907.WMF
3.9.2 IOB (INPUT OUTPUT BOARD), MCU (MAIN CONTROL UNIT)
[A]: Cables
[A]
[B]: IOB ( x 8)
[C]: MCU ( x 5)
NOTE: When replacing the MCU, always [C]
reattach the three NVRAMs
(IC101, 108, 109) on the new
MCU.
⇒ IMPORTANT: Before performing Memory
Clear, be sure to write down the [B]
User Code and Counter data and
print out the SMC sheet.
⇒
IC101
NOTE: When replacing the NVRAM,
except for IC109 (B0109001: for IC108
counter), NVRAM service parts
are blank RAM (contain no data).
If these RAMs are installed as B010R950.WMF
they are in the B010, the machine IC109
will not function properly. Therefore after mounting the service part NVRAM
onto the MCU board, be sure to perform Memory Clear (SP5801), then re-
enter the UP/SP mode data manually.
SM 3-35 B010
BOARDS Rev. 3/2002
3.9.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)

[A]
[A]: Ribbon cables
[B]: Optional stamp board
(if installed)
[C]: IPU ( x 8)
[C]
[B] B010R552.WMF
3.9.4 HDD REPLACEMENT
⇒ Rear right, rear left covers ( 3.2.2)

[A]: HDD Unit ( x 4, x 4)
[A]
[B]: HDD Cover ( x 4)

[C]: HDD ( x 3) B010R553.WMF
[C]
The machine cannot operate with only one

functional HDD. A defective HDD must be [B]
installed to restore full operation.
Both disks must be the same model and
capacity.
Execute the following SP:
B010R554.WMF
If a new HDD is not available

Execute to disable HDD access so the customer can continue using the
4960 015
machine.
After installing a new HDD, do the following in the order listed below
After installing the HDD, execute to clear the bad sector count stored in
4960 007, 008
NVRAM for the old HDD1 (007) or HDD2 (008).
4960 003, 004 After installing the HDD, execute to format HDD1 (003) or HDD2 (004).
B010 3-36 SM
Rev. 3/2002 ADJUSTMENTS
3.10 ADJUSTMENTS
3.10.1 CIS AND WHITE PLATEN ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
Perform this adjustment after replacing the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) or the
white platen roller.
This adjustment achieves even image density, even if the image density of the
white platen roller is uneven. The standard original used for this adjustment is one-
sheet of plain paper (cut sheet or roll) paper with a horizontal main scan and
vertical sub scan (945 W x 210 L mm ± 5mm).
NOTE: The width of the main scan direction must be 926 mm or more.
⇒ 1. On the operation panel, press #.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Enter
and
3. Hold down E for more than 3 seconds.
5. Enter 4428 002, press , and then press Start to execute the image scan
adjustment.
6. Insert the original.
7. Enter 4428 001, press and then press Start to confirm that the previous SP
executed correctly.
SM 3-37 B010
ADJUSTMENTS
3.10.2 LPH ADJUSTMENT

Summary
Remove the LPH, replace the three ROMs on the VDB, and then install the new
LPH. (See section 3.4.2.)
Before replacing the right copy tray, read the LPH settings from the labels attached
to the LPH.
SP2965 001 (ML) aaa SP2965 002 (MR) bbb SP2965 003 (SL) ccc SP2965 004 (SR) d
Write down the four numbers on the right side of each label (aaa, bbb, ccc, d).
These are the recommended factory settings for each SP.
After replacing the LPH (LED Print Head) and inputting the above settings, execute
a test print in the IPU Test Pattern mode to make sure that the LPH joints are
aligned correctly.
Entering the LPH Factory Adjustments
1. Press #.
2. Enter and then hold down E for over 3 seconds to enter the SP
Mode.
4. Enter 2965 001, enter the recommended setting for the first SP, and then press
.
5. Enter the settings for 002, 003, and 004. (Just press to move to the next
SP.) Make sure that you press after you enter each setting
6. Press the Exit button, enter 2941 001, and then press .
7. Enter 03 for IPU Test Pattern 3, press , and press Exit. The machine is now
in the IPU Test Pattern mode.
8. At the top of the screen press Copy Mode to return to the main operation
screen.
B010 3-38 SM
ADJUSTMENTS
Printing and Checking the Test Pattern

1. Feed any wide original 914 mm (36”) wide and at least 297 mm (11”) long. (A
blank sheet cut from the roll is sufficient.) After a few seconds, the IPU Test
Pattern prints.
2. Fold the printed pattern and measure 150 mm (about 6”) to the left and right
from the center fold [A] [B]
The LPH has three sections: LPH1 on
the left, LPH2 in the center, and LPH 3
B010R563.WMF
on the right. The LEDs overlap slightly
where the segments are joined at LPH1,
LPH2 [A], and at LPH2, LPH3 [B].
Replacement
If the lines are faint and appear neither
Adjustment
white nor black, the LPH is adjusted
and
correctly.
B010R561.WMF
If black or white lines are clearly visible

(see the diagram below), the LPH joints are
B010R568.WMF
out of adjustment.
At LPH1, LPH2 [A] too many LEDs are
switched off and the result is a white line.
At LPH2, LPH3 [B], too many LEDs are
switched on, and the result is a black line.
[A] [B]
B010R562.WMF
SM 3-39 B010
ADJUSTMENTS
3. If the left line is black, adjust SP2965 001 up, and if it is white, adjust it down.
4. If the right line is black adjust SP2965 002 up, and if it is white, adjust it down.
• Insert the wide original between each adjustment to print another pattern and
check the effect of each adjustment.
• Adjusting these SPs up in intervals of 10 (410, 420, etc.) switches off one
LED for every interval, and adjusting down 10 switches on one LED.
• Adjusting these SPs up less than 10 (411, 412, etc.) decreases the light
intensity of the LED, and adjusting down less than 10 increases the light
intensity.
• Adjust the lines until they are faint; the lines cannot be completely erased.
5. Broken lines across the IPU Test Pattern indicate that the sub scan timing
between LPH1, and LPH2 [A], or between LPH2 and LPH3 [B] is incorrect.
[A] [B]
B010R564.WMF
6. To adjust the timing at the joints:

SP2965 003 (SL) Adjusts the timing at LPH1, LPH2 [A]
SP2965 004 (SR) Adjusts the timing at LPH2, LPH3 [B]
a) First adjust 2965 003, and make a test print.

b) If the timing at joint [A] is incorrect, adjust 2965 003 again.
c) When the timing at joint [A] is correct, adjust 2965 004 until the timing at
joint [B] is correct.
B010 3-40 SM
ADJUSTMENTS
3.10.3 IMAGE POSITION, MAGNIFICATION, MARGIN

ADJUSTMENTS
Do these adjustments if the customer is unhappy about the above properties of the
output.
Before you do any measurements, allow the test print output to cool for three
minutes.
NOTE: Always do these adjustments in the order prescribed below.
START
↓
1 Printer: Skew Adjustment for SP1914 002, 003 (Fusing Pressure Adjustment)
Long Printouts Standard: No more than 1 mm skew /1 m
Replacement
Difference between the two SP values must be less than 30.
Adjustment
and
2 Printer: Sub-scan SP1915 001 (Magnification Adj. by Fusing Motor Speed)
Magnification Adjustment Standard: Magnification error less than ±0.3%.
↓
3 Scanner Mask Setting SP4012 (Scanner Erase Margin) → 0
↓
4 Erase Margin Setting SP2101 001~003 (Printing Erase Margin: Leading, Trailing,
Left)→ 5 mm
↓
5 Printer: Leading Edge SP1001 (Leading Edge Registration)
Registration Standard: 5±0.5 mm
↓
6 Printer: Side-to-side SP1002 (Side-to-side Registration)
Registration Standard: 5±0.5 mm
↓
7 Printer: Cut Length Adjustment SP1920 (Cut Length Adjustment)
SP1921 (Cut Length Adjustment)
Standard: Depends on the length
↓
8 Scanner: Magnification SP4101 (Scanner Main Scan Magnification)
SP4008 (Scanner Sub Scan Magnification)
Standard: Magnification error less than ±0.5%
↓
9 Scanner: Leading Edge SP4010 001 (Scanner Sub Scan Registration)
Registration Standard: ±1.5 mm
↓
10 Scanner: Side-to-side SP4011 (Scanner Main Scan Registration)
Registration Standard: ±1.5 mm
↓
11 Printer/Scanner: Trailing Edge SP4961 (Original Adjustment)
Registration (Synchro-cut) SP4961 001 Standard: 210 mm ±0.5 mm
SP4961 002 Standard: 1000 mm ±1 mm
↓
12 Scanner Mask Setting SP4012 (Scanner Erase Margin)
Return to previous setting (before step 3)
↓
13 Erase Margins SP2101 001~003 (Printing Erase Margins: Leading, Trailing,
Left) → Return to previous setting (before step 3)
↓
END
SM 3-41 B010
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Skew adjustment for long printouts

1. Set normal weight plain paper (841 mm wide/E size, from roll 1) and print an
IPU dot pattern with SP2941-1 (IPU Test Pattern – Pattern 11), of length 6 m,
and output to the rear exit.
2. At the rear paper exit, measure the amount of skew on the output. Make sure it
is within the standards below.
Allowed skew < 1 mm per meter
3. If the amount of measured shift is not within standards, adjust the right and left
fusing pressure from the pressure roller with the following SP codes.
SP1914 002 Fusing Pressure Roller Motor – Right Pressure Adjustment
SP1914 003 Fusing Pressure Roller Motor – Left Pressure Adjustment
If the paper is skewed to the right, weaken the pressure on the right roller, then
increase the pressure on the left roller.
To determine if there is skew, look at the trailing edge.
The SP values must be the same size, but of opposite sign (for example, if SP
1914 002 is –10, SP 1914 003 must be + 10). The difference between the two
SP values must be less than 30.
If roller pressure adjustment is not successful, return the SP settings to their

previous values. Then do the next procedure to adjust the line speed, and then
try again to adjust roller pressure.
B010 3-42 SM
ADJUSTMENTS
2. Printer sub-scan magnification adjustment

1. Set normal weight plain paper (841
mm wide/E size, from roll 1) and
print an IPU dot pattern with
SP2941-1 (IPU Test Pattern – One strip of
Pattern 11), of length 6 m, and 20 squares
output to the rear exit. 1189 mm

2. Within one A0 length (1189 mm) of
the leading edge, measure the
lengths of six strips of 20 squares
on the test pattern, as shown on the Plain paper
drawing. (6 m)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Also, within 50 mm of the trailing
and
edge, measure the length of one
strip of 20 squares on the test
500 mm
pattern.
B010R569.WMF
Standard Ave. length of the 7 patterns = 108.373 mm ±0.3%

• If the measurements are not within standard, execute SP1915-001
(Magnification Adj. by Fusing Motor Speed). Setting a larger value stretches
the image.
• If skew could not be adjusted in the previous procedure, set a smaller value
for SP1915-001 that is within the above standard.
• If horizontal lines are blurred at the trailing edge, set a smaller value for
SP1915-001 that is within the above standard.
SM 3-43 B010
ADJUSTMENTS
3. To set the scanner mask for the adjustments

1. Execute SP5990 002 to print the SMC Copy List (a list of the SPs).
2. Set the following SPs to zero to make measurement easier.
SP4012-1 Scanner Erase Margin – Leading Edge
SP4012-2 Scanner Erase Margin – Trailing Edge
SP4012-3 Scanner Erase Margin – Left
SP4012-4 Scanner Erase Margin – Right
4. To set the erase margin

Set the following SPs to 5 mm to make measurement easier.
SP2101-1 Printing Erase Margin – Leading Edge
SP2101-2 Printing Erase Margin – Trailing Edge
SP2101-3 Printing Erase Margin – Left
5. To adjust leading edge registration for the printer

mm wide/E size, from roll 1) and print
an IPU dot pattern with SP2941-1 (IPU
Test Pattern – Pattern 11).
5 ± 0.5 mm
2. Measure the leading edge registration.

Standard 5±0.5 mm
3. Adjust SP1001 (Leading Edge

Registration) if necessary.
B010R565.WMF
6. To adjust side-to-side registration for the printer

mm wide/E size, from roll 1) and print 5 ± 0.5 mm
an IPU dot pattern with SP2941-1 (IPU
Test Pattern – Pattern 11).
2. Measure the side-to-side registration.
Standard 5 ± 0.5 mm
3. Adjust SP1002 (Side-to-Side

Registration) if necessary.
B010R566.WMF
B010 3-44 SM
ADJUSTMENTS
7. To adjust cut length

1. Using the Preset Cut feature, make standard cuts of plain paper for A4
sideways, A3 sideways, A1 lengthways, and A0, A sideways, B sideways, D
lengthways, and E.
2. Measure the cuts and check them against the standards in the table.
Up to 297 mm Less than ± 2 mm
298 - 800 mm Less than ± 3 mm
801 - 1189 mm Less than ± 4 mm
1190 - 2500 mm Less than ± 7.5 mm
2501 - 3600 mm Less than ± 11 mm
3601 - 6000 mm Less than ± 20 mm
Replacement
Adjustment
3. If a measurement does not meet the standard, then adjust the following SPs for
and
each roller and paper type.
SP1920-1~81 Cut Length Adjustment
SP1921-1~25 Cut Length Adjustment
8. To adjust scanner magnification

1. Copy an OS-A-1 Test Chart with plain paper (cut sheet or roll).
2. Measure the length and width of the images on the original and the copy.
Standard Less than ± 0.5 %
3. If the measurements do not meet the standard, adjust the following SP codes.
SP4101 Scanner Main Scan Magnification
SP4008 Scanner Sub Scan Magnification
9. To adjust scanner leading edge registration

NOTE: Make sure that you execute the copy with manual density set at the
operation panel.
2. Measure the leading edge registration.
Standard Within ± 1.5 mm
3. If the measurement does not meet the standard, adjust the following SP code.
SP4010 001 Scanner Sub Scan Registration
SM 3-45 B010
ADJUSTMENTS
10. To adjust scanner side-to-side registration

NOTE: Make sure that you execute the copy with manual density set at the
operation panel.
2. Measure the side-to-side registration, within 50 mm from the leading edge of
the copy .
Standard Within ±2 mm
3. If the measurement does not meet the standard, adjust the following SP code.
SP4011 Scanner Main Scan Registration
11. Printer/scanner trailing edge registration (synchro-cut)

1. Prepare two originals. One must have length 210 mm, and the other must have
length 1000 mm.
2. Make a copy of each original with plain paper in the synchro cut mode.
3. Compare the original and cut copy paper lengths.
4. If the measurements do not meet the standards (see the table below), adjust
the following SP settings.
SP4961 001 Original Adjustment – Synchro Cut Adjustment 210 mm
Standard: 210 mm ±0.5 mm
SP4961 002 Original Adjustment – Synchro Cut Adjustment 1000 mm
Standard: 1000 mm ±1 mm
12. To reset the scanner mask

Reset SP4012 001~004 (Scanner Erase Margins – Leading, Trailing, Left, Right) to
the previous settings (see the SMC list printed earlier).
13. To reset the print erase margin

Reset the print erase margins to the previous settings (see the SMC list printed
earlier).
SP2101 001 Printing Erase Margin – Leading Edge
SP2101 002 Printing Erase Margin – Trailing Edge
SP2101 003 Printing Erase Margin – Left
B010 3-46 SM
Rev. 06/2004 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE
⇒ 3.11 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE

IMPORTANT: Before performing Memory Clear, be sure to write down the User
Code and Counter data and print out the SMC sheet.
1. Inform the customer that you are about to perform a Memory Clear. Then,
make sure to write down the User Code and Counter data stored in Copier
Features/Key Operator Tools.
2. Print out the SMC Sheet (SP5990).
3. Make sure to write down the following SP data:
1) SP4906-090: Edge Data – Smoothing Filter
2) SP4906-091: Edge Data Threshold – Smoothing
Replacement
4. Perform the actual Memory Clear (SP5801).
Adjustment
5. Input the UP/SP data written on the SMC printout.
and
NOTE: Values that have been changed from their defaults are shown in blue
with an asterisk (*).
6. Input the following UP/SP data:
1) SP4428-002: Image Scan Adjustment
2) SP4960-001: HDD1 Media Check
-002: HDD2 Media Check
-003: HDD1 Formatting
3) SP5811: Serial Number
4) SP5907: Plug & Play
5) System Setting: Date/Time
7. Perform the following SP Modes:
3) SP3001-002: ID Sensor Initialization
SM 3-47 B010
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure

To prevent the machine from being damaged, Enter SP mode, then turn the
the SC can only be reset by a service main power switch off and on.
A
representative (see the note below). The
copier cannot be operated at all.
The SC can be reset by turning the main Turn the operation switch or main
power switch off and on if the SC was caused power switch off and on.
B by incorrect sensor detection. A level B’ SC can only be reset by
turning the main power switch off
and on.
The copier can be operated as usual except Turn the operation switch off and
C
for the unit related to the service call. on.
shooting
Trouble-
The SC history is updated. The machine can The SC will not be displayed.
D be operated as usual. All that happens is that the SC
history is updated.
NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then
reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load
before replacing motors or sensors.
3) When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the display does
not indicate the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after
leaving the SP mode. This does not apply to Level B’ codes.
4) Some of these SC codes contain more than one level (SC303-1,
SC303-2, SC303-3, etc.); however, some SCs may display a “-1” even if
there is no second or third level (-2, -3).
SM 4-1 B010
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
4.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC192: AMDP download error
These SCs could occur at original scanning.
No. Meaning
SC192-1 AMDP1 program load error
SC192-4 AMDP4 program performance error
Definition: D
The AMDP ROM enable signal could not be detected within 8 ms after program
download to the AMDP started. Program download failed three times
consecutively.
Possible Cause
• AMDP program defective.
• IC card defective
• IPU defective
SC302: Charge Corona Output Error

Definition: D
Charge corona feedback voltage of less than 1V was detected for more than
200 s.
Possible Cause
• Charge power pack is defective.
• High voltage cable is defective.
• Poor connection of the power pack connector.
• Dirty charge corona unit caused leakage.
B010 4-2 SM
SC303: Charge corona wire cleaner error

No. Definition: D Possible Cause
SC303-1 Wire cleaner motor feedback voltage of Wire cleaner motor
less than 0.1 V was detected for more connector disconnected.
than 1s.
SC303-2 Corona wire cleaning did not complete Wire cleaner motor
within 80 s. connector disconnected.
Wire cleaner motor is
operating without a load.
SC303-3 Charge wire cleaner did not return to Wire cleaner stops due to
the home position. an overload.
SC303-4 Cleaner does not move from the home Wire cleaner motor drive
position. circuit malfunction.
Temporary Solution
The charge corona cleaner function should be switched off with SP2804.
SC306: Charge grid output error

Definition: D
shooting
Trouble-
Control PWM duty value is higher than 1% (FB less than 1V) for more than 200
ms (a grid current leak).
Possible Cause
• CBG power pack is defective.
• High voltage cable is defective.
• Poor connection of the power pack connector.
• Dirty charge corona unit causing leakage
SC330: Writing ASIC signal error

ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Definition: D
At power on, the stamp function could not execute successfully twice.
Possible Cause
• SP5137 setting incorrect
• Stamp board defective
• Poor stamp board connection
Temporary Solution
Use SP5137 to switch off the stamp function.
SM 4-3 B010
SC353: ID sensor malfunction

Definition: D
No. Definition Remarks

SC353-1 Vsp is 0V or more than 2.5 V During the copy cycle, these SCs are
SC353-2 Vsg is 0V or more than 2.5 V displayed after the copy is executed.
SC353-3 Edge pattern voltage (2.5 V)
cannot be detected
SC353-4 LED drive current (PWM value) This SC could occur while the ID sensor
is over 1000 or fixed at 0. is initializing.
SC353-5 Vsg cannot be adjusted to 4
±0.2V within 20 s.
Possible Cause
• ID sensor defective
• ID sensor connector defective
• IOB malfunction
• CBG power pack defective
• Dirty ID sensor
• VDB defective
• LPH defective
SC360: Hard disk connection error

Definition: D
The connection of the optional HDDs could not be confirmed.
No. Meaning
SC360-1 Hard disk 1 error
SC360-2 Hard disk 2 error
Possible Cause
• Hard disk connectors disconnected.
• Hard disk defective.
• IPU board defective
Temporary Solution
Use SP4960 015 to switch off HDD access so the customer can continue to use
the machine until a replacement HDD becomes available.
B010 4-4 SM
SC361: Hard disk read error

No. Meaning
SC360-1 Bad sectors Max.: HDD1
SC360-2 Bad sectors Max.: HDD2
SC360-3 Verifying error: HDD1
SC360-4 Verifying error: HDD2
SC360-5 Formatting error: HDD1
SC360-6 Formatting error: HDD2
SC360-7 Device error: HDD1
Definition: D
Image data on the HDD cannot be read.
Possible Causes What Happens
Bad sectors created on the hard disk during Bad sector information is written to NVRAM
operation. and these bad sectors will no longer be
accessed for writing information to disk.
Bad sectors created on the hard disk while Use SP4906 003, 004 to format the disk
shooting
Trouble-
executing SP4960-1,-2 (HD media check). and replace bad sectors with other sectors.
Bad sectors created on the hard disk while The affected hard disk requires
formatting SP4960-3,-4 (HD formatting). replacement (too many bad sectors exist
already).
SC362: IMAC (Image Memory Access Controller) error

No. Meaning
SC362-1 Video input error
SC362-2 Video output error
SC362-4 Mode setting error
SC362-51 DMA transfer error: HDD1
SC362-52 DMA transfer error: HDD2
Definition: D
At the IPU, an error was detected during data compression with the GAIMAC
ASIC or during data transfer to memory.
Possible Cause
• Software error, IPU defective. Update the firmware. If this does not solve
the problem, replace the IPU board.
SM 4-5 B010
SC365: Image processing parameter error

Definition: D
An image processing data file not stored in the memory was required when
writing started due to software error.
Possible Cause
• Software error. Replace software (all three firmware modules).
SC391: Development bias error

Definition: D
A development bias feedback voltage of less than 0.25V was detected for more
than 200 ms while the PWM duty value was more than 1% (development bias
leak).
Possible Cause
• Bias power pack defective
• Bias cable defective
• Poor bias cable connection
• Bias leak
SC401: Transfer corona leak error

Definition: D
A transfer corona feedback voltage of less than 0.25V was detected for more
than 200 ms.
Possible Cause
• T&S power pack defective.
• Transfer corona cable defective.
• Poor transfer corona cable connection.
• Dirty T&S corona unit caused leak
B010 4-6 SM
SC411: DC separation corona current leak

Definition: D
A dc separation feedback voltage of less than 0.5V was detected after more
than 200 ms while the PWM duty value was more than 17%.
Possible Cause
• T&S power pack defective.
• Paper separation current cable defective.
• Poor paper separation current cable connection.
SC440: Drum drive motor lock

Definition: D
The motor lock signal is on longer than 5 s while the drum drive motor is on.
Possible Cause
• Drive mechanism overload.
• Motor defective.
shooting
Trouble-
SC441: Development drive motor lock
Definition: D
No. Meaning
SC441-1 Development drive motor lock signal is low longer than 5 s when the
development motor stops.
SC441-2 Development drive motor lock signal is high longer than 5 s when the
development motor rotates.
Possible Cause
• Drive mechanism overload
• Motor defective
• Motor disconnected
SC506: Registration motor lock

Definition: D
The registration motor lock signal is high longer than 5 s during operation.
Possible Cause
• Drive mechanism overload.
SM 4-7 B010
SC508: Cutter 1 home position error 1

Definition: B
Both left and right home position switches of the upper cutter were on just after
the main switch was turned on, or just after the upper feed tray was opened and
closed.
Possible Cause
• Right or left home position switch defective.

Definition: B
No. Meaning
Left home position switch stays on 300 ms after the cutter
SC509-1
starts moving from left to right.
Right home position switch stays on 300 ms after the
SC509-2
cutter starts moving from right to left.
Possible Cause
• Cutter motor cable disconnected
• Cutter motor overload
• Motor defective

Definition: B
No. Meaning
Right home position switch stays off 1 s after the cutter
SC510-1
Left home position switch stays off 1 s after the cutter
SC510-2
starts moving from right to left.
Possible Cause
• Motor defective
B010 4-8 SM

Definition: B
Both left and right home position switches of the lower cutter were on just after
the main switch was turned on, or just after the lower feed tray was opened and
closed.
Possible Cause
• Right or left home position switch defective.

Definition: B
No. Meaning
Left home position switch stays on 300 ms after the cutter
SC512-1
Right home position switch stays on 300 ms after the cutter
SC512-2
Possible Cause
shooting
Trouble-
• Motor defective

Definition: B
No. Meaning
The right home position switch stays off 1 s after the cutter
SC513-1
The left home position switch stays off 1 s after the cutter
SC513-2
Possible Cause
• Motor defective
SM 4-9 B010
SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS Rev. 3/2002
SC541: Fusing thermistor open

Definition: A
The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor was below 7 °C for 10 s.
Possible Cause
• Fusing thermistor defective
• Thermistor cable disconnected
SC542: Fusing temperature warm-up error

⇒ Definition: A
No. Definition
After switching on the machine, or after opening and closing the
SC542-1 machine, during warmup the hot roller did not attain the ready
temperature within 5 minutes.
After the ready temperature, the hot roller did not reach the target
SC542-2
control temperature within 5 minutes.
Possible Cause
• Fusing lamp defective
• IOB board defective
• MCU board defective
SC543: Fusing overheat error 1 (software)

Definition: A
A fusing temperature of over 215 °C (419°F) was detected for 5 s
Possible Cause
• PSU defective
SC544: Fusing overheat error 2 (hardware)

Definition: A
The BICU detects an overhead error even if the software overheat protection
does not work.
SC544-1 Latch signal remains on for 50 ms
SC544-2 Normal signal on for 1 s
Possible Cause
• PSU board defective
B010 4-10 SM
Rev. 3/2002 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
SC545: Fusing lamp overheat error 3

Definition: A
After reaching the ready temperature, the hot roller does not rotate, and the
fusing lamp stays on at full power for 50 s.
Possible Cause
• Hot roller thermistor not positioned correctly
SC546: Unstable fusing temperature

Definition: A
No. Meaning Remarks
SC546-1 Fusing temperature rapidly Temperature fluctuates greater
fluctuating. than 20°C (68°C) at 1 second
intervals.
SC546 -2 Fusing temperature fluctuating Temperature fluctuates 20°C
over a long interval. (68°C) more than 3 times during
60 s interval.
Possible Cause
shooting
Trouble-
• Poor thermistor connection
SC547: Zero-cross signal malfunction

Definition: A
No. Meaning
SC547-1 Abnormal mains frequency was detected more than 10 times.
SC547-2 No zero-cross signal detected for 1 second.
No zero-cross signal detected for 2.5 s after the main switch is turned
SC547-3
on.
Possible Cause
• Electrical noise on the power line.
• PSU defective.
⇒ • Fuse 302 open
SC549: Pressure roller thermistor abnormal

Definition: D
SC549-1 During fusing motor rotation, pressure roller temperature detected
⇒ SC549-2 lower than 7°C (44.6°F) for 5 s.

Pressure roller temperature detected higher than 235°C (455°F) for 5
s.
Possible Causes
• SC549-1: Thermistor disconnected or connector damaged.
• SC549-2: Thermistor shorted or connector damaged.
SM 4-11 B010
SC550: Left fusing pressure motor home position error 1

Definition: D
The left pressure motor did not return to home position 9 s after the left pressure
motor started.
Possible Cause
• Motor drive mechanism overload.
• Pressure home position sensor defective.
SC551: Left fusing pressure motor home position error 2

Definition: D
The left pressure motor was still at the home position 1.5 s after the start signal
turned on.
Possible Cause
• Motor drive mechanism overloaded.
• Pressure home position sensor defective or disconnected.
SC552: Right fusing pressure motor home position error 1

Definition: D
The right pressure motor did not return to home position 9 s after the right
pressure motor started.
Possible Cause
• Pressure home position sensor defective.
SC553: Right fusing pressure motor home position error 2

Definition: D
The right pressure motor was still at the home position 1.5 s after the start signal
turned on.
Possible Cause
• Pressure home position sensor defective or disconnected.
B010 4-12 SM
SC554: Fusing drive motor error

Definition: D
The fusing drive motor lock signal stayed on (remained HIGH) for 5 s.
Possible Cause
• Fusing motor drive mechanism overloaded.
SC600: Operation panel/MCU communication error

Definition: D
The operation panel and MCU are not communicating.
Possible Cause
• Loose harness
• MCU defective
SC601: IPU/CIS communication error
shooting
Trouble-
Definition: D
The IPU and CIS are not communicating.
Possible Cause
• MCU defective
• Loose harness
SC602: Communication error between IPU and HDC

Definition: D
The IPU and HDC (hard disk controller chip mounted on the IPU) are not
communicating.
Possible Cause
• IPU board defective
• HDC mounted on IPU incorrectly
SC603: IPU/AMDP communication error

Definition: D
The IPU and AMDP are not communicating after 6 AMDP data transmissions.
Possible Cause
• IPU defective.
SM 4-13 B010
SC605: BICU/MCU error

Definition: D
The BICU and MCU are not communicating due to a serial data communication
error or a serial data receive buffer overflow.
Possible Cause
• MCU defective
SC951: F gate signal error

Definition: D
The paper is ejected with no image (or a partial image) because the FGATE
signal that triggers image writing failed to switch off after 60 s.
Possible Cause
• Software defective. Replace the software (all three firmware modules).
• MCU defective
• IPU defective
SC953: Scanner image setting error

Definition: D
The IPU did not issue the signal required for the scanner to start image
processing.
Possible Cause
SC954: Printer Image Setting Error

Definition: D
The IPU did not issue the signal required to start image processing for the
printing mode.
Possible Causes
SC955: Memory Setting Error

Definition: D
Settings required for memory to start image processing are not sent from the
IPU.
Possible Causes
B010 4-14 SM
SC964: Scanner start signal error

Definition: D
The scanner receives another start signal after scanning has already started.
Possible Cause
SC965: Print start signal error

Definition: D
The printer received another print start signal after print job has already started.
Possible Cause
SC980: HDD access error

Definition: D
Incorrect parameter sent to the HDC (hard disk controller chip mounted on the
shooting
Trouble-
IPU) from the BICU.
No. Meaning
SC980-1 IDNF error (HDD1)
SC980-2 IDNF error (HDD2)
SC980-3 ABRT error (HDD1)
SC980-4 ABRT error (HDD2)
SC980-5 Sequence error (HDD1)
SC980-6 Sequence error (HDD2)
Possible Causes
• MCU defective
SM 4-15 B010
SC981: HDD response error

Definition: D
No response from the hard disk within 5 s after the BICU chip on the main board
sent read/write commands to the HDD controller.
No. Meaning
SC981-1 Power off wait (HDD1)
SC981-2 Power off wait (HDD2)
SC981-3 DMA transfer answer wait (HDD1)
SC981-4 DMA transfer answer wait (HDD2)
SC981-5 Spindle motor answer wait (HDD1)
SC981-6 Spindle Motor answer wait (HDD2)
Possible Cause
• HDD defective or poor connection due to vibration
SC982: MSU error

MSU: Memory Supercharger Unit (hard disk with hard disk controller)
Definition: D
MSU (Memory System Unit) memory configuration does not meet
specifications.
SC982-1 HDD1
SC982-2 HDD2
Possible Cause
Hard disk capacity is insufficient (does not meet specification).
SC984: IMAC initialization failure

Definition: D
A hard disk was accessed when the context table RAM of the IMAC (Image
Memory Access Controller) is initialized at the beginning of the copy cycle.
Possible Cause
B010 4-16 SM
SC997: HDD Read Error

Definition: D
Memory could not be swapped during long original scanning.
No. Meaning
SC007-0 Copier application
SC997-1 Scanning application
SC997-2 Internal error (memory stack failure)
Possible Cause
SC998: NVRAM Error

Definition: D
An error occurred in the NVRAM.
No. Meaning
At power on, 00h could not be read as “00h” when
shooting
SC998-1
Trouble-
the NVRAM was checked.
At power on, 55h could not be read as “55h” when
SC998-2
At power on, AAh could not be read as “AAh”
SC998-3
when the NVRAM was checked.
At power on, FFh could not be read as “FFh” when
SC998-4
Possible Cause
• NVRAM not installed correctly
SM 4-17 B010
JAM CODE TABLE
4.3 JAM CODE TABLE

Printer Unit
Code Jam Detection Condition Location*1 Remarks
1 At power on Not specified
3 Paper not reached roll lead edge sensor 1. A2 These are jams when
4 Paper not reached roll lead edge sensor 2. A2 paper does not
5 Paper not reached roll lead edge sensor 3. A1 activate the sensor.
11 Paper not reached cutting sensor 1. A2
12 Paper not reached cutting sensor 2. A1
13 Paper not reached registration sensor. B
15 Paper not reached exit sensor. C
16 Paper not reached upper exit sensor. C
34 Paper not reached by-pass feed sensor. A3
53 Paper stays at roll lead edge sensor 1. A2 These are jams when
54 Paper stays at roll lead edge sensor 2. A2 paper stays at the
55 Paper stays at roll lead edge sensor 3. A1 sensor.
61 Paper stays at cutting sensor 1. A2
62 Paper stays at cutting sensor 2. A1
63 Paper stays at registration sensor. B
65 Paper stays at exit sensor. C
66 Paper stays at upper exit sensor. C
84 Paper stays at by-pass feed sensor. A3
*1
A1,A2, B, C and P refer to the area of the jam in the illustration that is displayed on the touch panel when
an error occurs.
Scanner Unit
Code Jam Detection Condition Location*1 Remarks
1 At power on. P
Original does not reach the registration
32 P
sensor.
Original registration sensor does not
33 P
switch off.
34 Original stays at the registration sensor. P
Original stays in scanner unit, but does not
38 P
reach the registration sensor.
40 Scanner stop switch is pressed P
Original does not reach the original exit
41 P
sensor.
*1
A1,A2, B, C and P refer to the area of the jam in the illustration that is displayed on the touch panel when
an error occurs.
B010 4-18 SM
Rev. 3/2002 COVER OPEN
4.4 COVER OPEN

Location Shut off line
Original Feed Unit Safety Original feed motor, original exit gate solenoid (DC 24V
Switch line)
Toner Hopper Cover Open Development drive motor (DC 24V line)
Switch
⇒ Upper Unit Safety Switch Development drive motor, CGB power pack,
TS power pack, registration motor.
Paper Exit Cover Switch Registration motor, drum motor, left fusing pressure
motor, right fusing pressure motor, paper junction gate
solenoid, pick-off pawl solenoid (DC24V lines)
Upper Roll Tray Safety Switch Roll feed motor (DC 24V line), anti-condensation heaters
(AC line)
Cutter Safety Switch 1 (Upper) Cutter motor (DC 24V line)
Lower Roll Tray Safety Switch Roll feed motor (DC 24V line), anti-condensation heaters
(AC line)
Cutter Safety Switch 2 (Lower) Cutter motor (DC 24V line)
Original Feed Unit Open Sensor Original feed motor, original junction gate solenoid (DC
24V line)
Upper Unit Open Sensor Development drive motor, CGB power pack,
shooting
Trouble-
TD power pack, registration motor.
SM 4-19 B010
IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART
4.5 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART

4.5.1 DATA FLOW IN 1-TO-1 COPY MODE
Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F Data Flow

Board
CIS VDB LPH

OIPU (ASIC)
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
25 MHz
25 MHz
Stamp AMDP x3 IMAC x2 OIPU: Auto Shading, Magnification, Image

Editing, Print Editing
IPU Board
A M D P : Filtering
(MTF, Smoothing, Independent Dot
HDD x2 Erase, Line Width Correction)
γ Correction
Gradation Processing
(Error Diffusion/Dither Matrix)
MSU
B010T502.WMF
B010 4-20 SM
4.5.2 DATA FLOW IN REPEAT COPY MODE

Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F
Board
Data Flow
CIS OIPU (ASIC) VDB LPH
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel 25 MHz
25 MHz
Stamp AMDP x3 IMAC x2

OIPU: Auto Shading, Magnification, Image
IPU Board
AMDP: Filtering
HDD x2 (MTF, Smoothing, Independent Dot
Erase, Line Width Correction)
shooting
Trouble-
γ Correction
MSU (Error Diffusion/Dither Matrix)
B010T501.WMF
SM 4-21 B010
4.5.3 DATA FLOW IN SCANNING MODE

Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F
Board
Data Flow
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
25 MHz
25 MHz

IPU Board
A M D P : Filtering
γ Correction
MSU
B010T503.WMF
4.5.4 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (A0 OR SMALLER)

Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F
Board
Data Flow
CIS VDB LPH

OIPU (ASIC)
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
25 MHz
25 MHz

IPU Board A M D P : Filtering
γ Correction
MSU
B010T504.WMF
B010 4-22 SM
4.5.5 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (LARGER THAN A0)

Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F
Board
Data Flow
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
25 MHz
25 MHz

IPU Board
A M D P : Filtering
shooting
Trouble-
γ Correction
MSU
B010T505.WMF
SM 4-23 B010
4.5.6 DATA FLOW IN TEST PATTERN PRINTING

Printer Scanner
Controller PC
I/F
Board IPU Test Pattern
VDB Test Pattern
CIS VDB LPH

OIPU (ASIC)
2 bit/pixel
8 bit/pixel
E/O Parallel
E/O Parallel
25 MHz
25 MHz

IPU Board
A M D P : Filtering
γ Correction
MSU
B010T506.WMF
B010 4-24 SM
IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING
4.6 IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING

4.6.1 FLOW CHART
Image
Problem
VDB Test NG Problem image YES

LPH Defective
pattern output area 1/3 unit.
OK NO
VDB Defective
NG
shooting
Trouble-
IPU Defective or
IPU Test NG Harness defective
pattern output between the IPU
and the VDB.
OK
CIS defective or
Harness defective
between the IPU and
the CIS.
B010T500.WMF
NOTE: For the VDB/IPU test patterns, use SP2942.
SM 4-25 B010
IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING Rev. 3/2002
4.6.2 SCANNING
1. No image (blank copy/print, or no image with only vertical black lines
on the output)
Possible causes:
1) Connection problem between CIS and IPU.
2) CIS defective
2. No image (solid black copy/print, or no image with B010T511.WMF

only vertical white lines on the output)
Possible causes:
1) Connection problem between CIS and IPU.
2) CIS defective
3. Light image B010T512.WMF
Possible causes:
1) Low CIS output
2) IPU board defective
4. Vertical black lines B010T513.WMF
Possible causes:
⇒ 1) Dirty CIS cover glass
2) CIS defective
5. Vertical white lines B010T514.WMF
Possible causes:
1) Dirty exposure glass
2) Dirty or scratched white platen roller
3) CIS defective
B010T515.WMF
B010 4-26 SM
6. Black or white bands with no image-width 1/8 A0 (E) size

Possible causes:
1) Connection problem between CIS and IPU
2) CIS output error
3) IPU board adjustment error
B010T516.WMF
7. White lines every 1mm pitch in halftone areas
Possible causes:
CIS defective
8. Bands/lines every 8mm pitch in halftone areas

Possible causes:
LPH defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-27 B010
4.6.3 PRINTING
1. No Image (blank copy/print)
Possible causes:
1) VDB board defective
2) IPU board defective
3) LPH (LED head) defective
B010T517.WMF
2. Band with no image-width 1/3 of image
Possible causes:
Connection problem between VDB and LPH
B010T518.WMF
3. Bands with no image-width 1/8 A0 (E) size
Possible causes:
VDB board defective
B010T519.WMF
4. Vertical white and black line at 150 mm from center.

Possible causes: 150 mm 150 mm
LPH Joints adjustment error

(☛ 3.10.2 )
B010T520.WMF
B010 4-28 SM
5. Horizontal line broken at 150 mm from center.

Possible causes:
LPH subscan timing error at joint position
(☛ 3.10.2 )
B010T521.WMF
shooting
Trouble-
SM 4-29 B010
SERVICE TABLES
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADING
5.1.1 OVERVIEW
The MCU (Main Control Unit) board flash-memory contains the software for this
machine. To upgrade the software, you need three IC cards:
• BICU (1 card)
• SCU (1 card)
• AMDP (Advanced Multi-media Display Processor) (1 card)
To copy the software into the flash memory on the MCU board, insert the cards in
the MCU slots as explained in the following procedures.
There are no procedures for copying firmware from the machine to an IC card.
There are no procedures for copying machine settings either to or from an IC card.
Service
Tables
SM 5-1 B010
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
5.1.2 UPGRADING THE SCU FIRMWARE
CAUTION: 1) Always turn the main switch off before inserting or removing an IC
card.
2) Keep the main switch on during software installation.
3) Protect IC cards from heat, humid air, and sunlight.
4) Handle IC cards with care to avoid damaging them.
Check the checksum value displayed on the panel at the end of installation. For a
Notes release document, check the "16BitSum (Little Endian)" total checksum.
Follow this procedure to upgrade only the SCU.
NOTE: If you need to upgrade both the SCU and BICU, they can be upgraded
together. ( 5.1.4)
1. If you need to check the current version of the software installed in the
machine, enter the SP mode and check the SCU version number displayed
below the Copy SP button on the touch panel.
2. Turn the main switch off.
3. Remove the rear right cover.
4. Make sure that TB101 [A] is set to 1-2 Short
5. With Side A of the SCU IC card [B] facing up, insert it into the upper right slot.
[B]
[A]
B010S500.WMF
6. Turn the main switch on. LED 102 and 104 start flashing, and the
following display appears on the touch panel.
B010S501.WMF
NOTE: If the message does not appear, the IC card may contain corrupt data.
In this case, turn the main switch off and discontinue installation.
7. Confirm that the card has the required version.
B010 5-2 SM
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
8. On the touch panel, press INSTALL to start the installation. On the MCU board,
LED101 lights and MCU LED102 starts flashing faster.
• The “Erasing” progress bar tells you that the old software is being erased,
and then will be replaced by the “Writing” progress bar that indicates the new
software is being downloaded from the card.
• The Erasing and Writing progress bars will display alternately until the data
transfer is completed.
• Installation requires 2 or 3 minutes.
• When you see the following message, the update is completed.
B010S502.WMF

10. Remove the IC card.
11. Turn the main switch on.
12. Confirm that the machine starts normally. If the machine does not start
normally, redo the procedure.
Service
Tables
SM 5-3 B010
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
5.1.3 UPGRADING THE BICU FIRMWARE

Follow this procedure to upgrade only the BICU firmware.
NOTE: If you need to upgrade both the SCU and BICU, they can be upgraded
together. ( 5.1.4)
1. If you need to check the current version of the software installed in the
machine, enter the SP mode and check the BICU version number displayed
2. Switch the main switch off.
3. Remove the right rear cover.
4. With side A of the BICU IC card [A] facing up, insert it into the bottom slot of the
MCU.
5. Make sure that jumper TB101 [B] is set to 1-2 Short .
[B]
[A]
B010S503.WMF
6. Turn the main switch on. LED 102 and 104 start flashing. When LED 103
lights and goes off after about 30~50 seconds, LED 102 and LED 104 flash
slower, and this means that the upgrade is completed. (No message is
displayed to indicate when the upgrade is completed.)
8. Remove the IC card.
9. Turn the main switch on, and then confirm that the machine starts normally.
B010 5-4 SM
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
5.1.4 UPGRADING THE SCU AND BICU TOGETHER

The SCU and BICU cards can be inserted at the same time in order to update both
with one operation.
1. If you need to confirm the version numbers of the currently installed software,
enter the SP mode and check the SCU and BICU version numbers displayed
2. Switch the main switch off.
3. Remove the right rear cover.
4. On the MCU, make sure that jumper TB101 [A] is set to 1-2 Short .
5. With side A facing up, insert the SCU IC card [B] in the upper right slot.
6. With side A facing up, insert the BICU IC card [C] in the lower left slot.
[B]
[A]
[C]
Service
Tables
B010S504.WMF
7. Turn the main switch on. LED 102 and 104 start flashing, and the
following display appears on the touch panel.
B010S501.WMF
• The “Erasing” progress bar tells you that the old software is being erased, and
then will be replaced by the “Writing” progress bar.
• The Erasing and Writing progress bars will display alternately until the data
transfer is completed.
• Installation requires 3 or 4 minutes.
SM 5-5 B010
SOFTWARE UPGRADING
• When you see the following message, the update is completed.
B010S502.WMF
8. Turn the main switch off, then remove the IC cards.

9. Turn the main switch on, then confirm that the machine starts normally.
5.1.5 UPGRADING THE AMDP FIRMWARE

Follow this procedure to upgrade the firmware for the AMDP (Advanced Multi-
media Display Processor).
NOTE: Upgrading AMDP firmware requires that you change jumper TB101. Do not
attempt to install the AMDP with the SCU firmware IC card in the upper
right slot. If you need to update the SCU, upgrade it separately. ( 5.1.2)
1. Set jumper TB101 [A] to 2-3 short
2. With side A of the AMDP IC card [B] facing up, insert it into the lower slot.
[A]
[B]
B010S507.WMF
3. Turn the main switch on. LED102 and LED104 start flashing. LED103
lights and LED104 starts flashing faster. The installation starts. There are
no messages on the screen.
4. Wait for about 30 seconds. LED 103 goes off, then LED104 starts flashing
slower.
5. Turn the main switch off, then remove the IC card.
6. Turn the main switch on, then confirm that the machine starts normally.
7. Before you install the back cover, re-set TB101 to 1-2 Short (Normal).
B010 5-6 SM
Rev. 02/2003 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE
5.2 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE

5.2.1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETTINGS
On the left side of the touch panel, press J, then on the touch panel press
System Settings, then press a tab. Press the Next and Prev buttons to browse all
the available items.
Item Default Setting
General Features
Fuser Adjustment: Paper Tray
By-pass Tray Paper Type Plain
Original Size Detect A Series
Tray Paper Size A Series
Paper Volume Setting ---
Tray Paper Type ---
Original Output Tray Upper
Copy Output Tray Front
Paper Exit Hold On
Original Feed Delay 1 Wait 1 sec.

Original Scan Delay 2 Wait 1 sec.
Function Priority Copier
⇒ Function Reset Timer Instant
System Reset Timer 60 sec.
Fine Magnification: Copier 0.0%
Fine Magnification - Printer 0.0%
Auto Paper Roll Switching Off
Service
Tables
Panel Tone On
Ready Tone On
Copy Count Display Up
Panel Off Level Level 4
Panel Off Timer 60 sec.
Panel Off Timer 15 min.
Date/Time
Date MM/DD/YYYY
Time 00hr. 00mi. 00sec.
Key Operator Tools
User Code Access Off
Key Counter Access Off
Set Key code Off
Key Operator Access Off
Auto Off Timer 60 min.
AOF (Keep It On) *1 On
Optional Hard Disk Installed
*1
Enables auto off for Energy Star and should not be changed without the consent
of the customer.
SM 5-7 B010
UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE
5.2.2 INITIAL COPIER SETTINGS

Copier Features, then press a tab. Press the Next and Prev buttons to browse all
General Features
Initial Mode Set Standard
Copy Reset Timer 60 sec.
Original Mode Priority Text
Auto Image Density Priority On
Density Level Priority 0
Auto Paper Select Priority On
Paper Roll Priority Paper Roll 1
Print Start Trigger Set Original
Original Size Auto Select On
Memory Status Display Page

Maximum Copy Quantity 99 copies
Noise Reduction ---
Original Mode Quality Level ---
Original Mode Density Level ---
Sort Copy Setting Copy After Each Scan
Sample Copy Priority 0
Partial Copy Priority 0 ~ 210
Feed Start Trigger Set Original
Reproduction Ratio
User Reproduction Ratio 1 70.7% /
User Reproduction Ratio 2 100.0%
User Reproduction Ratio 3 141.4%
Preset Reduce/Enlarge Priority 100%
Shortcut Reduce/Enlarge 71%
User Auto Reduce/Enlarge A Series
Use Auto R/E Original Size Detect Original Orientation
Adjust Image
Margin Adjust Priority Top +20 Bottom 0
Shift Image Area Priority Up 1 Right 20
Border Erase Priority 10 mm
Image Repeat Separation Line None
Double Copies Separation Line Separation Line
Program/Delete, Overlay Format 1 Programmed
Program/Delete, Overlay Format 2 Not Programmed
B010 5-8 SM
UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE
Stamp
Preset Stamp Priority COPY
Preset Stamp Format Priority ---
Preset Stamp Position Adjustment ---
Date Stamp Format Priority MM/DD/YYYY, 1X, Horiz. Top Left
Date Stamp Position Adjustment Left 24, Center 0, Right 24, Bottom 24
Background Numbering Format 1X Dark
User Stamp Format —

User Stamp Position Adjustment —
Program Delete/User Stamp —
Page Numbering Format 1, 2, …, Horiz., Top Left
Page Numbering Position Adjustment Left 24, Center 0, Right 24, Top 24, Bottom 24
Key Operator Tools
Check/Reset/Print Copy Counter —
Program/Change/Delete User Code —
Service
Tables
SM 5-9 B010
SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES Rev. 3/2002
5.3 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES

5.3.1 ENTERING SP MODE
To enter and leave SP Mode
1. On the operation panel, press #.
2. On the key pad, press
3. Hold down E for 3 seconds.
-or-
5. If the machine has a printer controller, press Copy SP/Printer SP.
B010S508.WMF
6. To leave the SP Mode, press the Exit button in the upper right corner.
Switching between SP Mode and Copy Mode

Use the Copy Mode and SP Mode buttons on the touch panel to toggle between
the Copy Mode screen and the SP Mode screen.
1. Enter the copy SP mode. ( 5.3.1)
2. On the touch panel, press Copy Mode [A] to return to the initial screen.
[A]
B010S510.WMF
3. Select the paper size and print mode.

4. Press SP Mode [B] to return to the SP Mode screen.
B010 5-10 SM
Rev. 3/2002 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES
[B]
B010S511.WMF
5. Set up the print job (feed source, paper size, etc.)

6. Press the SP mode button to return to the SP mode, and then select the SP
code for the report that you want to print (SP5902-002 for example).
5.3.2 HOW TO USE THE SP MODE

SP mode level
The SP (Service Program) are assigned three-level coded numbers. For example,
SP2101-002 (Printing Erase Margin – Trailing Edge) where:
Service
Tables
B010S512.WMF
NOTE: For a detailed listing of all SP codes see, refer to the tables later in this
chapter.
When you open SP mode, you will see the SP codes listed with the first 4 numbers.
Press the appropriate button on the touch panel to access the SP function.
• An asterisk (*) at the end of a number means that sublevels exist for that SP
code.
• SP codes without the asterisk are accessed immediately and have no sublevels.
Important points to remember about entering settings for SP codes

• In some cases, the screen is not large enough to present all the SP codes at
once. If you do not see the SP code that you want, press the Next and Prev
buttons in the lower right corner of the screen to browse the lists.
• After entering a number for a setting, always press .
⇒ • To toggle between a +/- press the and E keys.
• After you press the button of an SP code that requires a setting, a box opens so
you can enter a number, press a Yes or No button, etc. After entering the
number setting, always press , and then press Exit to close the entry box.
SM 5-11 B010
SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES Rev. 3/2002
To open select SP codes for setting

Use one of the following methods to find the entry level of any SP code.
Direct Entry. Use this method if you know all the numbers or at least the first four
digits.
1. Use the number pad on the operation panel to enter the number.
• If you know the complete number, make sure that you always enter 3 digits
for the last number. For example, to access SP2102-2, you must enter 2102
002
• If you enter only the first 4 digits, the entry box for that SP code (or first
option) will open automatically. For example, if you enter only 2102, then the
entry box for SP2102-1 will open. To scroll to the next setting, press the Next
button.
2. Press .
Browsing. You can browse the lists if you do not know the number of the SP code
that you need.
1. Press the appropriate button to display the next level.
2. If you do not see the number of the SP you are seeking, use the Next and Prev
button to display more SPs.
To print an SMC report

The SP mode settings are adjusted before shipment, and are listed in the copy of
the SMC print provided on the original table. Keep this SMC print in the used-toner-
bottle cabinet as a record of the default settings.
Follow this procedure if you want to print another copy of the SMC list.
1. Enter the SP Mode. ( 5.3.1)
2. Press Copy Mode to return to the initial screen and select the feed source and
other settings for the print job, and then press SP Mode to return to the SP
Mode.
3. Enter 5990 002 and then press .
4. Press Start.
B010 5-12 SM
Rev. 3/2002 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION
To initialize the SP settings

Follow this procedure to initialize the SP settings and restore them to their factory
default settings.
1. Enter the SP Mode. ( 5.3.1)
2. Print an SMC list (see the procedure above).
3. To initialize the SP settings, enter 5801, press , and then press Start.
NOTE: The total counter is not cleared when RAM is cleared.
4. After initializing the SP settings, use SP5811 to re-enter the serial number of
the machine.
⇒ 5.4 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION

Follow this procedure to calibrate the touch panel.
1. On the operation panel, press .
2. Press and release E 5 times to open the menu.
3. Without touching the touch panel, press . After a few moments, a circle will
appear, in the upper left corner.
4. With a blunt instrument, press the circle in the upper left corner.
CAUTION: Never press the touch panel with a sharp object.
5. Next a circle will appear, in the lower right corner.
Service
Tables
6. Touch the center of the circle in the lower right corner.
7. Then touch any location on the touch panel, and make sure that the a circle
appears at the point you touched.
8. Repeat Step 6 several times to confirm that the touch panel is correctly
calibrated.
9. To leave the touch panel calibration mode, press OK, press q:EXIT, then press
EXECUTE.
10. Wait for the panel to go off, then turn the machine off and on.
SM 5-13 B010
SOFTWARE, SYSTEM AND COPY SETTING RESET Rev. 3/2002
⇒ 5.5 SOFTWARE, SYSTEM AND COPY SETTING RESET

5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET
To reset the software, hold down and together for 10 seconds. This software
reset is the same as turning the machine off on and with the main power switch.
NOTE: You cannot use this procedure to reset the software when the operation
panel has stalled or if a fusing-related SC code has appeared.
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTING AND COPY SETTING (UP MODE) RESET

System Setting Reset
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults using the
following procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the “#” key and touch the “System Setting” key.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.
Copy Features Reset

The copy settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults using the following
procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the “#” key and touch “Copy Features” key.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press “Yes”.
B010 5-14 SM
PRINTING TEST PATTERNS
5.6 PRINTING TEST PATTERNS

5.6.1 IMAGE PROCESSING TEST PATTERNS
Print an IPU Test Pattern if you experience problems with image processing (poor
halftones, line widths, etc.) Printing an IPU test pattern will check that the CIS and
IPU are operating correctly.
1. Enter the SP mode. ( 5.3.1)
2. Enter 2942 (Print Test Pattern), select 2942-1 (Mode) and press . Then
select IPU from the IPU or VDB selection and press , then Exit.
3. Enter 2941 001 (IPU Test Pattern – Pattern), then press .
4. Enter a number to select a pattern, then press .
5. Press Exit, select Copy Mode, select an appropriate paper size and insert a
blank sheet as your original.
NOTE: The original should be 914 mm (W) x 297 mm (L) (36" x 11"). A blank
sheet cut from a roll is sufficient.
NOTE: If you need to adjust print settings, use the Copy Mode and SP Mode
buttons to toggle between the initial screen and the SP mode screen.
6. If the Print Start Trigger (User Tool) is set to Set Original mode the unit will print
automatically.
7. Exit SP Mode.
Service
Tables
Item Pattern
0 No pattern
1 Gray scale 1: 128 dots, 16 grades, Vertical gray scale
2 Gray scale 2: 16 dots, 256 grades, Vertical gray scale
3 Gray scale 3: 256 lines, 16 grades, Horizontal gray scale
4 Gray scale 4: 16 lines, 256 grades, Horizontal gray scale
5 Density patch
6 Vertical line 256 dots
7 Vertical line 1 dot
9 Horizontal line 1 dot
10 Horizontal line 2 dots
11 Cross stripe 1 dot
12 Cross stripe 2 dots
13 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (128-dot interval)
14 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot - even/odd reversal (128-dot interval)
15 Slanting cross stripe 2 dots (128-dot interval)
16 Slanting cross stripe 2 dots - even/odd reversal (128-dot interval)
17 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (64-dot interval)
18 Slanting cross stripe 1 dot - even/odd reversal (64-dot interval)
19 Rope pattern 1 dot
20 Rope pattern 1 dot main scan even/odd reversal
SM 5-15 B010
PRINTING TEST PATTERNS
Item Pattern
21 Rope pattern 2 dots
22 Rope pattern 1 dot main scan even/odd reversal
23 Rope pattern
24 Frequency characteristic - Vertical
25 Frequency characteristic - Horizontal
26 Frequency characteristic - Vertical/Horizontal
27 Gray scale 5 - Vertical/Horizontal
29 Black
30 White
31 AMDP evaluation counter
33 Independent 1 dot (16-dot interval)
38 Independent 2 dots (16-dot interval)
5.6.2 IMAGE DATA PATH TEST PATTERNS

Print a VDB test pattern to check that the LPH and VDB are operating correctly.
1. Enter the SP mode. ( 5.3.1)
2. Enter 2942 (Print Test Pattern), select 2942-001 (Mode) and press . Then
select VDB from the IPU or VDB selection and press , then Exit.
3. Enter 2942 003 (Pattern) and press .
4. Enter a number to select a pattern, then press .
5. Press Exit, select Copy Mode, select an appropriate paper size and insert a
blank sheet as your original.
NOTE: The original should be 914 mm (W) x 297 mm (L) (36" x 11"). A blank
sheet cut from a roll is sufficient.
NOTE: If you need to adjust print settings, use the Copy Mode and SP Mode
buttons to toggle between the initial screen and the SP mode screen.
6. If the Print Start Trigger (User Tool) is set to Set Original mode the unit will print
automatically.
B010 5-16 SM
Rev. 3/2002 INPUT CHECK
7. When testing is complete enter 2942 (Print Test Pattern), select 2942-001
(Mode) and press . Return the Mode selection to IPU and press , then
Exit.
NOTE: Failure to reset 2942-1 to IPU mode will result in blank copies
when in normal copy mode.
8. Exit SP Mode.
Item Pattern Remarks

0 No pattern
1 Vertical line 2 dots (5.4-mm pitch)
Horizontal line 2 dots (5.4-mm pitch) To check the jitter deviation of the
2
printer engine
4 Basic frame (AOT)
Grid pattern To check the magnification
5
deviation in the printer engine
NOTE: Do not touch any other key until printing is completed.
5.7 INPUT CHECK

You can check the sensors and switches with SP5803.
• Select one of the modes in the tables.
• Each mode displays an 8-digit number, numbered 7~0 reading from left to right.
• Each bit indicates the current status of the corresponding sensor or switch by
Service
Tables
displaying a 0 or 1. For example:
Display 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[1] P1E Input Status

bit-7 Toner overflow sensor 0: End, 1: Not end
⇒ bit-6
bit-5
Registration sensor
Right pressure HP sensor
1: Paper present, 0: No paper
0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
bit-4 Left pressure HP sensor 0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
bit-3 Roll tray 1 safety switch 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-2 Roll tray 2 safety switch 0: Closed, 1: Open
⇒ bit-1
bit-0
By-pass feed sensor
Paper exit sensor
SM 5-17 B010
INPUT CHECK Rev. 3/2002
[2] P1F Input Status

bit-7 Exit cover switch 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-6 Toner hopper cover open switch 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-5 Upper unit safety switch (24V) 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-4 Upper unit safety switch (5V) 1: Closed, 0: Open
bit-3 Fusing motor lock 1: Locked, 0: Operating
bit-2 Registration motor lock 1: Locked, 0: Operating
bit-1 Drum drive motor lock 1: Locked, 0: Operating
bit-0 Development motor lock 0: Locked, 1: Operating
[3] P1H Input Status

bit-7 Factory use only
bit-6 2nd roll tray installed 0: Installed, 1: Not installed
bit-5 VDB pixel count 0: None, 1: Ok
bit-4 Zero cross 0: On, 1: Off
bit-3 Key card set (Japan only) 0: Set, 1: Not set
bit-2 Key counter set (Japan only) 0: Set, 1: Not set
bit-1 Fusing overheat 0: Normal, 1: Overheat
bit-0 Fusing latch overheat 0: Normal, 1: Overheat
[4] P2E Input Status

bit-7 Paper end sensor 3 0: End, 1: Not end
bit-6 Auto feed switch 3 0: On, 1: Off
bit-3 Cutter 2 HP switch (right) 0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
bit-2 Cutter 2 HP switch (left) 0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
bit-1 Cutter 1 HP switch (right) 0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
bit-0 Cutter 1 HP switch (left) 0: Home position, 1: Not home pos.
[5] P2F Input Status

bit-7 Roll end sensor 3 0: End, 1: Not end
⇒ bit-6
bit-5
Roll end sensor 1
Roll end sensor 2
0: End, 1: Not end
0: End, 1: Not end
bit-4 Roll lead edge sensor 3 0: Paper present, 1: No paper
bit-1 Cutting sensor 2 1: Paper present, 0: No paper
bit-0 Cutting sensor 1 1: Paper present, 0: No paper
B010 5-18 SM
INPUT CHECK
[6] P1C Input Status

bit-7 Paper end sensor 2 0: Not end, 1: End
bit-6 Paper end sensor 1 0: Not end, 1: End
bit-5 Cutter safety switch 2 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-4 Cutter safety switch 1 0: Closed, 1: Open
bit-3 - Not used
bit-2 - Not used
bit-1 - Not used
bit-0 - Not used
[7] IRI Input Status

These settings are used during design and development to detect the current settings of
the DIP switches on the MCU (Main Control Unit) board.
[8] Scanner 1 Input Status

bit-7 - 1000 0000
bit-6 Original size A4/A sensor (Original set 0100 0000
sensor)
bit-5 Original size A3/B sensor 0010 0000
bit-4 Original size A2/C sensor 0001 0000
bit-3 Original size A1/D sensor 0000 1000
bit-2 Original size A0/E sensor 0000 0100
bit-1 Original registration sensor 0000 0010
bit-0 Original set sensor (Original size A4 sensor) 0000 0001
Service
Tables
[9] Scanner 2 Input Status
bit-7 - Not used
bit-6 - Not used
bit-5 - Not used
bit-4 Original upper exit sensor 0000 0000
bit-3 Original exit sensor 0000 1000
bit-2 Scanner stop switch 0000 0100
bit-1 Original feed unit safety switch 0000 0010
bit-0 Original feed unit open sensor (right) 0000 0001
SM 5-19 B010
OUTPUT CHECK Rev. 02/2003
5.8 OUTPUT CHECK

You can check the listed parts with SP5804.
Item Parts
1 Roll feed clutch 1
5 Registration Motor
6 Registration Clutch
7 Paper Junction Gate Sol.
8 Transport Fan Motors
9 Cutter 2
10 Roll Feed Motor 1 - Forward
11 Roll Feed Motor 1 - Reverse
14 Cutter 1
15 Drum Drive Motor
16 Fusing Drive Motor
17 Right Fusing Pressure HP Position
18 Right Fusing Pressure Jam Position
19 Left Fusing Pressure HP Position
20 Left Fusing Pressure Jam Position
22 Charge Corona Wire Cleaner Motor
23 Development Motor
24 Toner Supply Clutch
25 Pick-off Pawl Solenoid
29 LPH (LED Print Head)
30 Quenching Lamp
31 ID Sensor LED
32 Charge Corona
33 Charge Grid – Image Area
34 Charge Grid – ID Sensor Pattern
35 Charge Corona and Grid – Image Area
36 Development Bias – Image Area
37 Development Bias – ID Sensor Pattern
38 Transfer Corona – Leading Edge Plain Paper
39 Transfer Corona – Plain Paper
40 Separation Corona – Leading Edge Plain Paper
41 Separation Corona – Plain Paper
42 Total Counter
43 Anti-condensation Heater
50 Drum Potential Measuring Mode
51 Original Junction Gate Solenoid
52 Original Feed Clutch
53 Original Feed Motor – Forward
55 CIS LED
⇒ 56 Toner Supply Clutch
B010 5-20 SM
Rev. 4/2002 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
5.9 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES

SP Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / step] Example: [-9 ~ +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. Setting can be adjusted
in the range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after and NVRAM reset, and
the value can be changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
italics Comments.
DFU Denotes “Design or Factory Use”. Do not change this value.
Japan only Feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
SP1-XXX Feed
1 Mode Number/Name Function / [Setting]
1001 Leading Edge Registration
001 1st Roll Adjusts the printing leading edge registration.
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 3rd Roll To delay the starting position of the image, increase the
005 By-pass feed value.
1002 Side-to-Side Registration
001 1st Roll Adjusts the printing side-to-side registration.
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 3rd Roll To shift the starting position to the right, increase the value.
⇒
005 By-pass feed
1103 Fusing Idling Selects the fusing idling time.
[0 ~ 3/ 0 / 1 min. step]
0: No idling
1: 1 minutes
2: 3 minutes
Service
Tables
3: 5 minutes
1104 Fusing Temperature Control Sets the fusing temperature control.
[0~3, 0, 1/step]
0: On/Off (Pressure Roller Temp. Feedback)
1: On/Off (No Pressure Roller Temp. Feedback) DFU
2: Phase Control (Pressure Roller Temp. Feedback)
3: Phase Control (No Pressure Roller Temp.
Feedback) DFU
If the power supply to the machine is unstable, select 2.
1105 Fusing Temp. Adj.
001 Copy Ready Temperature Sets the copy ready fusing temperature.
[130 ~ 150 / 143 / 1°C/step]
Copying can begin at this temperature, before the hot roller
reaches the control temperature.
002 Constant Temperature Sets the fusing temperature for the constant temperature
Control control. DFU
[130 ~ 210 / 185 / 1°C/step]
003 Low Power Mode Sets the fusing temperature for low power mode.
[90 ~ 125 / 90 / 1°C/step]
005 Fusing Temperature Calibrates the scale for the fusing temperature settings.
Calibration DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 3 / 1°C/step]
006 Pressure Temp. Calibration Calibrates the scale for the pressure temperature control.
DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 0 / 1°C/step]
SM 5-21 B010
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES Rev. 02/2003

1106 Fusing Temperature Display Displays the hot roller and pressure roller temperatures.
1911 By-pass Feed Start Timing Adj. Adjusts the waiting time for the by-pass paper feed.
[0.5~8.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 second/step]
1912 Feed Motor Speed Correction
001 1st Roll Adjusts the feed motor speed. DFU
002 2nd Roll [-15 ~ +15 / -7 / 1% /step]
003 3rd Roll
1913 Fusing Motor Speed Adj.
001 RPM Adjusts the fusing motor speed. DFU
[-100 ~ +100 / +24 / 2/step]
002 Adj. Span in High Speed Adjusts the unit for the fusing motor speed control. DFU
Control [0.0 ~ +18 / 10 / 2%/step]
1914 Fusing Pressure Motor
001 Home Position Stop Mode Resets the fusing pressure roller motor to the home
position.
[1 = ON, 0 = OFF]
002 Right Pressure Adjustment Adjusts the pressure.
003 Left Pressure Adjustment [-25 ~ +25 / 0 / 1/step]
1915 Magnification Adj. by Fusing Motor The fusing motor of this machine rotates faster than the
Speed paper feed motor to stretch the paper slightly and prevent
wrinkles between the registration roller and the fusing unit.
Stretching the paper excessively could cause distortion of
the image.
001 Plain Adjusts the printer line speed.
[0.0~1.0 / 0.7 / 0.1/step]
002 Translucent Paper Adjusts the printer line speed.
[0.0~1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
003 Film Adjusts the printer line speed.
[0.0~1.0 / 0.4 / 0.1/step]
⇒ 1917 Ready Temp. Setting Select the ready fusing temperature.
[0 ~ 2/ 0 / 1 step]
0: Standard (143˚C)
1: 195°C (All paper types/ thickness)
2: 195°C (Translucent thickness 3 & 4)
1920 Cut Length Adjustment
001 1st Roll, 210 mm/8.5" or 9", Adjusts the 210-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
002 1st Roll, 297 mm/11" or 12", Adjusts the 297-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
007 1st Roll, 2000 mm/78", Plain Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
008 2nd Roll, 210 mm/8.5" or 9", Adjusts the 210-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
009 2nd Roll, 297 mm/11" or 12", Adjusts the 297-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-22 SM

Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
1920 013 2nd Roll, 1189 mm/44" or Adjusts the 1189-mm cut length.
48", Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
014 2nd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Plain Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
015 3rd Roll, 210 mm/8.5" or 9", Adjusts the 210-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
016 3rd Roll, 297 mm/11" or 12", Adjusts the 297-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
021 3rd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Plain Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Translucent [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
037 1st Roll, 2000 mm/78", Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
043 2nd Roll, 1189 mm/44" or Adjusts the 1189-mm cut length.
48", Translucent [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
044 2nd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
SM 5-23 B010

1920 048 3rd Roll, 594 mm/22" or 24", Adjusts the 594-mm cut length.
051 3rd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
067 1st Roll, 2000 mm/78", Film Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
48", Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
074 2nd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Film Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-24 SM

Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
081 3rd Roll, 2000 mm/78", Film Adjusts the 2000-mm cut length.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
1921 002 1st Roll, 6000 mm/236", Adjusts the 6000-mm cut length.
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
1925 Cut Length Offset Correction This setting corrects for factors that affect paper slippage
during feed, such as paper surface characteristics. DFU
[0 ~1 / 1 / 1 step]
0: Japanese paper (Factory standard)
1: Other countries paper
SM 5-25 B010

1950 Paper Exit Control
002 Copy Paper Hold Length Adj. Adjusts the amount of paper grabbed at the edge for
feeding.
[-50 ~ +50 / -14 / 1 mm/step]
The friction from grabbing the paper 14 mm from the edge
of the paper could cause poor image quality where the
paper was grabbed. If the image is very close to the edge of
the paper (less than 14 mm for example), adjust this setting
for less than –14.
1955 Transport Fan Rotation

001 Very Thin Paper Selects the transport fan rotation speed for Japanese
chemical paper. Japan Only
Press the appropriate button: OFF, 100%, or 20%
The suction created by the transport motor below the paper
feed path keeps the paper straight. The force of this suction
could be too great for extremely thin paper.
002 Stand-by Condition Selects the transport fan rotation speed for stand-by mode.
Press the appropriate button (30% ~ 100%)
B010 5-26 SM
SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP2-XXX Drum
2001 Charge Corona Adjustment
001 Image Area Adjusts the charge corona output. DFU
[-900~-1500 / -1250 / 1V/step]
002 Grid for Image Area Adjusts the charge grid output. DFU
[-560~-960 / -875 / 1V/step]
003 Grid for ID Sensor Pattern Adjusts the charge grid output for the ID sensor pattern.
DFU
[-560~-780 / -700 / 1V/step]
2101 Printing Erase Margin SP2946 must be at On, or these settings will be ignored.
001 Leading Edge Adjusts the printing margin.
002 Trailing Edge [0 ~ 100 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
003 Left
004 Right [0 ~ 100 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
2201 Development Bias Adjustment
001 Image Area Sets the development bias to adjust the toner amount for
the image area.
[-900 ~ -100 / -705 / 1V/step]
002 ID Sensor Pattern - Low Duty Sets the development bias to adjust the toner amount for
Copy Jobs the ID sensor pattern.
[-600 ~ -100 / -405 / 1V/step]
003 ID Sensor Pattern - High Sets the development bias to adjust the toner amount for
Duty Copy Jobs the ID sensor pattern.
[-600 ~ -100 / -475 / 1V/step]
004 Copy Jobs Determines the mode used for generating the ID sensor
pattern. See section 6.6.3 for details. Press the appropriate
button: High Duty Copy Jobs, Low Duty Copy Jobs
2207 Forced Toner Supply
001 Forced Toner Supply Press the start button to execute a forced toner supply.
Service
Tables
If this switched on, this SP supplies more toner to darken
light copies. For every execution, toner is supplied one
time. After doing this SP, make a copy and check the copy
density.
2208 Toner Supply Setting
001 Gain Adjusts the toner supply for ordinary operations by
adjusting the GAIN *(Vsp/Vsg). DFU
[0~9 / 1 / 1/step]
This setting may require adjustment for a customer with
special needs, e.g. continuous copy jobs of photographs.
002 Supply Capacity Selects the toner supply capacity for the job load.
[0.1~2.5 / 1.0 / 0.1/step]
The 1 setting is good for up to about 20% coverage, but can
be set to 2 for long copy jobs up to 100 copies. However, if
the image coverage is greater than 50%, even the 2 setting
may not be sufficient.
003 Toner Supply Mode Selects toner supply mode and switches off the ID sensor.
[0~2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Detect Mode
1: Fixed Mode (3%)
2: Fixed Mode (6%)
If the ID sensor is damaged and cannot be replaced
immediately, set to 1 or 2 so the customer can continue to
use the machine until a new ID sensor is available for
replacement. After installing a new ID sensor, reset to 0.
SM 5-27 B010

2301 Transfer Corona Output:
001 Plain Paper, Leading Edge Adjusts the transfer output power. DFU
002 Plain Paper, Central Image [150~1000 / 500 / 1/step]
003 Plain Paper, Trailing Edge
004 Plain Paper, Coefficient Adjusts the transfer output coefficient for the leading edge,
central image, and trailing edge. DFU
[0.5~2.5 / 1.0 / 0.1/step]
005 Translucent, Leading Edge Adjusts the transfer output power. DFU
006 Translucent, Central Image [150~1000 / 500 / 1/step]
007 Translucent, Trailing Edge
008 Translucent, Coefficient Adjusts the transfer output coefficient for the leading edge,
[0.5~2.5 / 1.0 / 0.1/step]
009 Film, Leading Edge Adjusts the transfer output power. DFU
010 Film, Central Image [150~1000 / 500 / 1/step]
011 Film, Trailing Edge
012 Film, Coefficient Adjusts the transfer output coefficient for the leading edge,
[0.5 ~ 2.5 / 1.0 / 0.1/step]
2401 Separation DC Timing Adj. Adjusts the separation dc timing. DFU
[-300 ~ 0 / -100 / 1/step]
2402 Separation AC Voltage Setting: Adjusts the separation ac voltage setting. DFU
[2600~6200 / 4200 / 1V/step]
2403 Separation DC Voltage Setting
001 Plain - Leading Edge Adjusts the separation dc voltage.
002 Plain [-300 ~ 0 / -200 / 1 µA/step]
003 Translucent - Leading Edge If this is too high, toner will be re-attracted from the paper to
004 Translucent the drum after transfer.
005 Film - Leading Edge
006 Film
2801 Developer Initial Setting Execute this SP only after replacing the developer.
Press Start to initialize.
Executing this SP raises the chargeability of the developer
in the development unit.
2803 Charge Corona Wire Cleaning Press Start to clean the charge corona wire. Executing this
SP also ensures that the cleaning pad is set at the home
position.
Cleaning requires about 60 seconds.
2804 Corona Wire Cleaning Interval Selects the interval.
[0~6 / 3 / 1 step]
0: None (no cleaning)
1: After the main switch is turned on.
2: After 300 m of copies
2812 Drum Cleaning Interval The drum reverses after this number of jobs, to clean the tip
of the cleaning blade. Set to 0 to disable this feature.
[0~5 / 1 / 1Job /step]
B010 5-28 SM

2923 Drum Set Mode
002 Execute After replacing the OPC or cleaning blade, run this SP and
press Start.
After OPC or cleaning blade replacement, dusts the drum
and blade with toner to reduce friction between the new
drum and/or new blade, reducing the chance of scouring
the drum or bending the blade.
2924 Developer Mixing Press Yes to enable developer mixing every time the power
is switched on.
Normally, the developer is mixed every time the machine is
powered on. However, this is not done the first time the
machine is powered up, to prevent the drum from rotating
while the packing material around the drum is in place. This
SP should be executed only after all packing material has
been removed. For details, see the Installation section.
2925 Transfer Corona Timing
001 On Timing Adjusts the on timing.
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / -4.2 / 0.1/step]
002 Leading Edge Adjusts the timing to switch from the leading edge to the
center.
[0~30 / 16 / 1 /step]
003 Trailing Edge Adjusts the timing to switch from the center to the trailing
edge.
[-30 ~ 0 / -8 / 1 /step]
2926 Used Toner Overflow Detection Enables/disables the used toner full detection. Press Yes to
enable, or No to disable. Normally, keep at Yes.
2927 Toner (Near) End Detection
001 Near End Level Selects the near end level (Vsp/Vsg). DFU
[0~5 / 2 / 1 step]
0: 0.150
Service
Tables
1: 0.175
2: 0.200
3: 0.225
4: 0.250
5: 0.275
Higher settings thin toner, lower settings thicken toner.
002 Toner End Level Selects the toner end level until the add toner lamp lights,
based on copy length (not the number of copies). See
section 6.6.7 for more details.
[0~3 / 1 / 1 step]
0: 1000 cm
1: 1500 cm
2: 2000 cm
3: 3000 cm
The numbers above are centimeters.
2928 Toner End Recovery
001 Recovery Level Selects the recovery level (Vsp/Vsg). DFU
[0~5 / 4 / 0.25 step]
0: 0.075
1: 0.100
2: 0.125
3: 0.150
4: 0.175
5: 0.200
SM 5-29 B010

2928 002 Recovery Detection Sets how many times the judgement is aborted when the
toner end detection is not nullified. DFU
[1~25 / 12 / 1/step]
2941 IPU Test Pattern Execute an IPU Test Pattern when a problem with image
processing is suspected. The IPU Test Pattern is also used
to check the alignment of the LPH components. For details,
see the Replacement and Adjustment section.
001 Pattern Selects the pattern.
[0~45 / 1 / 1 step]
0: None
1: Gray scale 1 (vertical)
3: Gray scale 3 (horizontal)
4: Gray scale 4 (horizontal)
5: Density patch
6: Vertical stripe
7: Vertical line 1 dot
8: Vertical line 2 dots
9: Horizontal line 1 dot
10: Horizontal line 2 dots
11: Cross stripe 1 dot
12: Cross stripe 2 dots
13: Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (128-dot interval)
14: Slanting cross stripe 1 dot even/odd reversal (128-dot
interval)
15: Slanting cross stripe 2 dots (128-dot interval)
16: Slanting cross stripe 2 dots even/odd reversal (128-dot
interval)
17: Slanting cross stripe 1 dot (64-dot interval)
18: Slanting cross stripe 1 dot even/odd reversal (64-dot
interval)
19: Rope pattern 1 dot
20: Rope pattern 1 dot main scan even/odd reversal
21: Rope pattern 2 dots
22: Rope pattern 2 dots main scan even/odd reversal
23: Rope pattern
24: Frequency characteristic (vertical)
25: Frequency characteristic (horizontal)
26: Frequency characteristic (vertical/horizontal)
27: Gray scale 5 (vertical/horizontal)
28: Gray scale 6 (vertical/horizontal)
29: Black
30: White
31: AMDP evaluation counter
33: Independent 1 dot (16-dot interval)
38: Independent 2 dots (16-dot interval)
B010 5-30 SM

2941 41: Independent 2 dots (128-dot interval)
003 Black Density Adjust the density of the test pattern. DFU.
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 step]
0: All Black
1: ID – 10/15
2: ID – 5/15
3: ID – 0/15
004 White Density Adjusts the density of the test pattern. DFU
[0 ~ 3 / 1 / 1 step]
0: All White
1: ID – 10/15
2: ID – 5/15
3: ID – 0/15
2942 Print Test Pattern
001 Mode Selects the test pattern mode. To select the pattern, press
IPU Pattern or VDB Pattern button.
Pressing IPU prints the IPU test pattern to confirm correct
data flow from the CIS to the IPU. If the pattern is abnormal,
there may be a problem with the contact image sensor.
Pressing VDB tests VDB/LPH image processing. If the
pattern is abnormal, then there may be a problem with the
VDB or LPH.
003 Pattern Selects the test pattern.
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
0: None
Service
1: Vertical Lines: 2-dot 5.4 pitch
Tables
2: Horizontal Lines: 2-dot 5.4 pitch
3: Vertical Lines: 2-dot
4: A0T
5: Grid Pattern
2946 Erase Setting Press On or Off to switch on or off the leading/trailing edge
function set with SP2101.
2960 LPH Thin Line Mode
003 5-bit On/Off Setting Enables/disables the thin line mode. Press On or Off. DFU
004 Correction Data 01 Sets data correction for 2-bit Data 01 to 5-bit. DFU
[0 ~ 31 / 7 / 1 step]
005 Correction Data 10 Sets data correction for 2-bit Data 10 to 5-bit. DFU
[0 ~ 31 / 17 / 1 step]
006 Correction Data 11 Sets data correction for 2-bit Data 11 to 5-bit. Adjusts
vertical and horizontal printer pixels proportionally. DFU
[0 ~ 31 / 25 / 1 step]
2965 LPH Joint Adjustment
001 LPH 1-2 Main Scan Adjusts the LPH joint between LPH1 and LPH2.
[0 ~ 999 / 500 / 1/step]
Adjust only after replacing the LPH.
002 LPH 2-3 Main Scan Adjusts the LPH joint between LPH2 and LPH3.
[0 ~ 999 / 500 / 1/step]
SM 5-31 B010

2965 003 LPH 1-2 Sub Scan Adjusts the data delay (due to misalignments of the LPH 1-
2 joint).
[102 ~ 267 / 168 / 1/step]
2965 004 LPH 2-3: Sub Scan Adjusts the data delay (due to misalignments of the LPH 2-
3 joint).
[2 ~ 100 / 5 / 1/step]
B010 5-32 SM
SP3-XXX Process Control

3001 ID Sensor Setting
001 PWM Setting Adjusts PWM. DFU
[0~1000 / 281 / 1/step]
002 Sensor Initialization Automatically adjusts the output to 4.0 V. During auto
adjustment, the voltage applied to the ID Sensor LED
depends on the PWM value.
Press the Start button to initialize the ID sensor LED with
the value entered for the PWM.
Initialization requires about 15 seconds. Do this adjustment
only after replacing the drum or the developer.
3103 ID Sensor Output Display (Vsp, Displays the values for Vsp/Vsg (0.0V~5.0V)
Vsg)
3910 Development Bias Timing
001 On Timing Adjusts the development bias on timing.
[-222 ~ +222 / 0 / 1 ms/step]
002 Off Timing Adjusts the development bias off timing.
[-222 ~ +222 / 0 / 1 ms/step]
3920 ID Sensor Timing Determines the intervals between ID sensor checks. An ID
sensor pattern is made after printing a page, if the print
length since the last ID sensor check has reached the
specified value. The numbers below are centimeters.
[20~1000 / 100 / 10 cm step]
Service
Tables
SM 5-33 B010
SP4-XXX Scanner
4008 Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Adjusts the magnification by changing the scanning speed.
[-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
4010 Scanner Sub Scan Registration
001 Leading Edge Fine adjusts the time between the sensor-on position and
the leading edge of the image.
[-10 ~ +10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trailing Edge Fine adjusts the time between the sensor-off position and
the trailing edge of the image. This determines the timing
for the CIS to stop reading the image after the original has
passed the registration sensor.
[-10 ~ +10 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4011 Scanner Main Scan Registration Adjusts the scan registration.
[-4 ~ +4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4012 Scanner Erase Margin
001 Leading Edge Adjusts the non-scanning area.
002 Trailing Edge [0.0 ~ +9.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 Left
004 Right
4013 Scanner Free Run
001 Start To start the free run, press the Start button.
To end the free run, press the Stop button.
The free run simulates scanning pages of length
determined by SP4013 003, with the interval between each
page determined by SP4013 002.
002 Page Interval Setting Adjusts the scanner free run (see the description for 4013
001).
[0 ~ 250 / 100 / 1 s step]
003 Original Length Setting Adjusts the scanner free run (the description for 4013 001).
[0.1 ~ 10 / 1.2 / 0.1 m step]
4101 Scanner Main Scan Magnification Adjusts the side-to-side scan magnification.
[-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 % step]
4303 Originals Smaller Than A4 Enables/disables the processing for small size originals.
Lengthwise. [0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1 step]
0: Copying disabled
1: Copy taken as A4 Lengthwise
⇒ 4428 Image Scan Adjustment
001 Flag Display Displays “Succeeded” after executing 4428-002.
002 Start Press the Start button to adjust the standard white level.
After adjustment, check the result with SP4428-001.
4903 Image Setting
006 Smoothing Filter Level - Selects the four-value diffusion filter level for the Photo
Photo (Hard Tone) mode.
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
This setting is effective only if the user has selected Photo
(Hard Tone) at the operation panel. The zero default setting
switches four-value error diffusion off. To weaken the effect,
select a low number (e.g. 1), or to strengthen the effect
select a higher number (e.g. 3).
B010 5-34 SM

4905 Line Thickness Mode
001 Generation Selects the thick/thin line mode (for the copied original
mode).
[0~15 / 10 / 1/step ]
For example, the default setting of 10 selects ‘Thin Level 2’
for the main scan and for the sub scan (see the table
below).
Then, the setting of 4905 002 adjusts the sensitivity of the
main scan direction setting, and the setting of 4905 003
adjusts the sensitivity of the sub scan direction setting.
0 is weak. 5 is strong. For example is the setting is 5 line
width correction will be done more often.
Main Scan Direction Sub Scan Direction
0 Disabled Disabled
1 Disabled Thin Level 1
2 Disabled Thin Level 2
3 Disabled Thick
4 Thin Level 1 Disabled
5 Thin Level 1 Thin Level 1
7 Thin Level 1 Thick
8 Thin Level 2 Disabled
11 Thin Level 2 Thick
12 Thick Disabled
13 Thick Thin Level 1
14 Thick Thin Level 2
15 Thick Thick
Service
Tables
002 Main Scan - Generation See the description for 4905 001.
003 Sub Scan - Generation [0~5 / 5 / 1/step ]
004 Text Selects the thick/thin line mode (for the text and blue line
modes).
[0~15 / 10 / 1/step ]
See the description for 4905 001.
005 Main Scan - Text See the description for 4905 001.
006 Sub Scan - Text [0~5 / 2 / 1/step ]
007 Text/Photo Selects the thick/thin line mode (for the text/photo mode).
[0~15 / 0 / 1/step ]
See the description for 4905 001.
008 Main Scan - Text/Photo See the description for 4905 001.
009 Sub Scan - Text/Photo [0~5 / 5 / 1/step ]
4906 Filter Setting
005 Full Size Mode Forces the reproduction ratio to be 100%, regardless of the
operation panel setting for the job. Press Yes or No.
007 Image Shift in Magnification Adjusts the magnification image shift.
[0~32767 0 / 00000 / 1/step] DFU
Can be set for each pixel.
010 Main Scan MTF-A Filter MTF-A filter strength in the main scan direction (Copy Mode
Level: Generation 25%- 25%-49.9%) DFU
49.9% [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
011 Sub Scan MTF-A Filter Level: MTF-A filter strength in the sub scan direction (Copy Mode
Generation 25%~49.9% 25%-49.9%) DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
SM 5-35 B010

4906 012 Main Scan MTF-A Filter MTF-A filter strength in the main scan direction (Copy Mode
Level: Generation 50% - 154.9%). DFU
50%~154.9% [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
013 Sub Scan MTF-A Filter Level: MTF-A filter strength in the sub scan direction (Copy Mode
Generation 50%~154.9% 50%~154.9%). DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
014 Main Scan MTF-A Filter MTF-A filter strength in the main scan direction
Level: Generation (150%~256.9%). DFU
150%~256.9% [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
015 Sub Scan MTF-A Filter Level: MTF-A filter strength in the sub scan direction
Generation 150%~256.9% (150%~256.9%). DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
016 Main Scan MTF-A Filter MTF-A filter strength in the main scan direction
Level: Generation (260%~400%) DFU
260%~400% [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
017 Sub Scan MTF-A Filter Level MTF-A filter strength in the sub scan direction
(260%~400%) (260%~400%). DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
018 γ Correction Data Selects correction for gamma data. DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
020 Filter Level: - Text 25% - MTF correction filter level (text mode, 25 ~ 49.9%).
49.9% (Main Scan) [0~6 / 6 / 1/step]
022 Filter Strength -Text 25% - MTF correction filter strength (text mode, 25 ~ 49.9%).
49.9% (Main Scan) [0~5 / 2 / 1/step]
Select a low number for a weak effect, a high number for a
strong effect.
024 Filter Level - Text 50% - MTF correction filter level (text mode, 50 ~ 154.9%).
154.9% (Main Scan) [0~6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
026 Filter Strength - Text 50% - MTF correction filter strength (text mode, 50 ~ 154.9%).
154.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
028 Filter Level - Text 155% - MTF correction filter level (text mode, 155 ~ 256.9%).
256.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
030 Filter Strength - Text 155% - MTF correction filter strength (text mode, 155 ~ 256.9%).
256.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
032 Filter Level - Text 257% - MTF correction filter level (text mode, 257 ~ 400%).
400% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
034 Filter Strength - Text 257% - MTF correction filter strength (text mode, 257 ~ 400%).
400% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
037 Filter Setting Filter Level: Selects the filter coefficient for the photo mode. DFU
Photo Mode (Smoothing) [0 ~ 4 / 4 / 1/step]
strong effect.
B010 5-36 SM

4906 038 Filter Strength: Photo Mode MTF correction filter strength for the photo hard tone mode.
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
039 Filter Level - Text/Photo 25% MTF correction filter level (text/photo mode, 25 ~ 64.9%).
- 64.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
041 Filter Strength - Text/Photo MTF correction filter strength (text/photo mode, 25 ~
25% - 64.9% (Main Scan) 64.9%).
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
043 Filter Level - Text/Photo 65% MTF correction filter level (text/photo mode, 65 ~ 154.9%).
- 154.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
65% - 154.9% (: Main Scan) 154.9%).
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
047 Filter Level - Text/Photo MTF correction filter level (text/photo mode, 155 ~ 256.9%).
155% - 256.9% (Main Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
155% - 256.9% (Main Scan) 256.9%).
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
Service
Tables
strong effect.
051 Filter Level - Text/Photo MTF correction filter level (text/photo mode, 257 ~ 400%).
257% - 400% (Sub Scan) [0 ~ 6 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
257% - 400% (Main Scan) 400%).
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
055 Filter Level: Pale Original MTF correction filter level (for pale originals).
[0 ~ 6 / 3 / 1/step]
strong effect.
056 Filter Strength: Pale Original MTF correction filter strength (for pale originals).
[0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
057 Filter Level: Generation Copy MTF correction filter level (for generation mode).
[0 ~ 13 / 6 / 1/step]
strong effect.
SM 5-37 B010

4906 058 Filter Strength: Generation MTF correction filter strength (for generation mode).
Copy [0 ~ 5 / 2 / 1/step]
strong effect.
070 Independent Dot Erase - L: Selects the independent dot erase setting (for generation
Generation mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 5 / 1/step]
Zero switches off this feature. A lower setting is erases
fewer dots, and a higher setting erases more dots.
071 Independent Dot Erase - M: Selects the independent dot erase setting (for generation
Generation mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 7 / 1/step]
See SP 4906 070 for an explanation.
072 Independent Dot Erase - H: Selects the independent dot erase setting (for generation
Generation mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 9 / 1/step]
Text mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 5 / 1/step]
Text mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 7 / 1/step]
Text mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 9 / 1/step]
Text/Photo mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 5 / 1/step]
Text/Photo mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 7 / 1/step]
Text/Photo mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 9 / 1/step]
Pale Original mode).
[0 ~ 14 / 5 / 1/step]
[0 ~ 14 / 7 / 1/step]
[0~14 / 9 / 1/step]
B010 5-38 SM

4906 090 Edge Data - Smoothing Filter To enable or disable the edge data saving, press No Keep
or Keep. DFU
091 Edge Date Threshold- Adjusts the threshold value for the edge data saving. DFU
Smoothing [0 ~ 255 / 200 / 1/step]
092 Blue Line Erase Level Selects the level for blue line erase mode (drop-out blue).
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1/step].
0: Weak
1: Medium
2: Strong
4907 Image Path Change
001 Scanner Image Correction Changes the path of the scanner image correction. DFU
[0~7 / 7 / 1 step]
0: After the scanner gamma correction
1: No correction
2: Before shading
3: Before scanning gamma correction
4: White shading data
5: Test pattern through
6: Scanner-reading through
7: Normal
013 Printer Mask Changes the path from the printer mask forcefully. DFU
[0 ~ 5 / 5 / 1 step]
0: Image from application
1: Image from MSU
2: Magnification
3: Test pattern
4: Scanned image
5: Normal
020 Image from Application Changes the path from the application program forcefully.
Service
Tables
Press the Test Pattern button or Normal button. DFU
021 Image to Application Changes the path to the application program forcefully.
DFU
[0 ~ 4 / 4 / 1 step]
0: Neutral
1: MSU
2: Scanned Image
3: Test Pattern
4: Normal
022 Scanner Test Path Selection Changes the path from the application program. DFU
[0~4 / 4 / 1 step]
0: After scanner image correction
1: After magnification process
2: After pre-filter process
3: After mask process
4: After image quality process
SM 5-39 B010

4960 HDD
001 HDD1 Media Check Press Start to detect defective sectors on the hard disk.
002 HDD2 Media Check Before shipment, the original defective sector information is
stored in the non-volatile memory. This information allows
the hard disk to avoid accessing the defective sectors. If
other sectors become defective after shipment, this sector
information must also be stored in non-volatile memory, to
prevent output of abnormal images. During media checks,
new defective sector information is stored in the IPU non-
volatile memory. This information allows the IPU to avoid
accessing the bad sectors. As check processing proceeds,
the progress is indicated by the displayed numbers (0 ~
100). Time required for execution depends on the hardware
specifications.
003 HDD1 Formatting Press Start to format the hard disk.
004 HDD2 Formatting Required time for execution depends on hardware
specifications. If defective sectors are not found, check
SP4960-001, 002. If a defective sector is found, some extra
time is required for sector substitution.
005 HDD1 Spindle Control Press Off or On to switch the hard disk off and on.
006 HDD2 Spindle Control The hard disk should stop operating whenever possible to
prevent noise and to protect the hard disk. However, if the
hard disk is not operating, the fast copy speed may slow
down, waiting for the hard disk to start.
007 HDD 1 Bad Sector Press Start to clear the bad sector from the NVRAM.
Information Reset Perform this setting after removing a defective disk and
008 HDD 2 Bad Sector replacing it with a new disk.
Information Reset
009 HDD1 Bad Sector Display Displays the number of defective sectors on the hard disk.
010 HDD2 Bad Sector Display The number is based on the defective sector information
that the IPU has created during operation. When the
number reaches 51, SC361 is displayed, then format the
hard disk with SP4960 001, 002.
011 HDD1 Model Name Display Displays the hard disk model name (40 characters) on the
012 HDD2 Model Name Display touch-panel display.
013 IDE Interface Form Selection Selects the data transfer format. DFU
Press the button for Ultra DMA or Multi Word DMA
015 HDD Connection On/Off Press On or Off to enable or disable hard disk detection.
Set to Off to disable a defective hard disk if either hard disk
malfunctions, so the customer can continue to use the
copier functions while waiting for a replacement disk.
4961 Original Adjustment

001 Synchro-cut Adjustment 210 Adjusts the synchro-cut position.
mm [-9.9 ~ +9.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Use the 210-mm position in the sample to check the
difference. This difference is used to calculate the motor
clock count for adjusting the difference.
002 Synchro-cut Adjustment Adjusts the synchro-cut position.
1000 mm [-9.9 ~ +9.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Use the 1000-mm position in the sample to check the
difference. This difference is used to calculate the motor
clock count for adjusting the difference.
003 Original Length Display Display the original length.
B010 5-40 SM
SP5-XXX Mode
5024 mm/inch Display Selection Selects the unit. Press mm or inch.
5113 Optional Counter Type Selects the setting for the keycard/MF accounting device.
Japan Only
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
0: None
1: Key Card – RK2, RK3, Rk4
2: Key Card – Count-down type
3: Pre-Paid Card
5: MF Keypad
511/ Disable Copying Enables/Disables printing. Japan Only
Press Yes or No to enable or disable this feature.
For CSS use only:
5120 Mode Clear Option Counter For a machine equipped with a counting device, this SP
Removal determines the next action when a copy job halts because
the card is removed, the card expires, or if the paper supply
runs out. Japan Only
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Yes
1: Stand-by
2: No
5137 Stamp Function On/Off Press Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable the stamp
function. Switch this on after installing the optional stamp
board.
⇒ Unnessary Service Programs deleted from this area.
Service
Tables
SM 5-41 B010
Unnessary Service Programs deleted from this area.
5801 Memory All Clear Press Start to initialize the non-volatile RAM.
Before initializing, print out an SMC report (SP5990-2).
5802 Print Free Run Conducts a free run in the previously specified mode.
Press On or Off to switch on or off.
5803 Input Check Allows you to test component input ( 5.7)
5804 Output Check Allows you to test component output ( 5.8)
5811 Machine Serial Number The serial number is set with this code before shipping.
5812 Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service Tel. Number Set the telephone number (up to 20 digits).
002 SMC Report Transfer Fax
No.
⇒ 5900 Function Reset Timer Adjusts the Function Reset Timer.
Specifies the length of the delay in switching from Copier
function to the Printer/Scanner function when the machine
receives a print/scan job.
[0, 3~30 / 0 / 1 sec step]
When the printer/scanner controller is connected, the timer

should be set to “0” (instant).
5907 Plug & Play Displays the model name (up to 50 bytes). DFU
5914 Printer Counter Display On/Off Press Yes to have the printer controller output displayed on
the screen when the User Tools/Counter key is pressed on
the operation panel.
This SP is effective only after the optional printer controller
is installed.
5945 Black and White Reversal Press No or Yes to switch off/on the display of the user
001 Preset Stamp stamps in reverse.
002 User Stamp
003 Page Numbering
004 Date Stamp
005 Background Numbering
⇒ 5957 Continuous Original Feed Enables or disables the continuous feeding of originals
through the original feeder. When enabled, originals can be
fed one by one during a copy job without having to wait for
each copy to exit.
5958 15 m Setting Enables or disables the optional special order firmware
designed for measuring 15 meter paper lengths.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
⇒ 5959 Design use only
5961 Paper Remaining Display Function Press the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the
paper remaining display on the operation panel.
If this SP is disabled, it cannot be switched on with the UP
mode settings.
5965 Restart Copy Function Enables/disables the restart copy function.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
B010 5-42 SM

5980 Counting Units: Total Counter Selects the units for North America. North America Only
[0~2 / 1 / 1 step]
0: Feet
1: Yards
2: Meters
Do not change this setting after installation.
5990 SMC Printout Print Start to output the print.

001 ALL The paper roll is automatically selected, and the by-pass
002 SP feed cannot be used. The image is output in an A4 LEF
003 User Program size.
004 Logging Data
5997 Optional Counter Unit Selects the units for the key counter. Japan only
Press x1/10 or press x1.
For North America, the key counter units depend on
SP5980.
Service
Tables
SM 5-43 B010
SP7-XXX Data Log

7001 Drum Drive Motor Operation Time Displays the drum drive motor operation time (for checking
the print count and drum operation time.)
7002 Original Counter
001 Total Sheet Count Displays the count for accessed features.
002 Copy Mode Sheet Count
003 Scanner Mode Sheet Count
006 Total Length
007 Copy Mode Length
008 Scanner Mode Length
7003 Print Counter Displays the count for accessed features.
001 Total Length
002 Copy Mode Length
003 Print Mode Length
004 Total Sheet Count
005 Copy Mode Sheet Count
006 Print Mode Sheet Count
7101 Total Print Length Count by Paper Width
096 914 mm Displays the print length for each paper roll width.
097 841 mm
098 594 mm
099 420 mm
100 297 mm
101 210 mm
102 660 mm
104 880 mm
105 800 mm
106 728 mm
107 515 mm
108 364 mm
109 257 mm
110 182 mm
128 Other
225 36 inch
226 24 inch
227 18 inch
228 12 inch
229 9 inch
230 30 inch
234 34 inch
235 22 inch
236 17 inch
237 11 inch
238 8.5 inch
7202 Copy Mode Scanning Counter
128 Other Displays the original scanning count as a 7-digit number.
129 A0
130 A1
131 A2
132 A3
133 A4
134 A5
B010 5-44 SM

7202 138 B1 Displays the original scanning count as a 7-digit number.
139 B2
140 B3
141 B4
142 B5
160 11 inch
166 8.5 inch
181 36 inch
182 24 inch
183 18 inch
184 12 inch
185 9 inch
186 30 inch
187 34 inch
188 22 inch
189 17 inch
7204 Total Sheets Count by Roll
001 1st Roll Displays the total copy count for each feed station.
002 2nd Roll
003 3rd Roll
005 By-pass feed
7301 Total Sheet Count by Reproduction Ratio

001 25.0 ~ 35.3% Displays the total copy count for each reproduction ratio (for
002 35.4 ~ 49.9% fixed reproduction ratios).
003 50.0 ~ 70.6%
004 70.7 ~ 99.9%
005 100%
Service
006 100.1 ~ 199.9%
Tables
007 200.0 ~ 400.0%
008 Direct Mag. Displays the total copy count for each feature.
009 Direct Size Mag.
010 Size Mag.
011 Fixed Mag.
012 User Auto R/E
013 Fine Tune
7304 Total Sheet Count by Copy Mode
001 Text Displays the total copy count for each copy mode.
002 Text/Photo Each counter counts up at the time of paper feed.
003 Photo
004 Pale Original
005 Generation
006 Blue Erase
007 Patched Original
008 Photo (Hard Tone)
022 Length Adjust
023 Shift
024 Border Erase
025 Delete Inside
026 Delete Outside
031 Double Copies
032 Image Repeat
SM 5-45 B010

7304 033 Positive/Negative Displays the total copy count for each copy mode.
034 Mirror Image Each counter counts up at the time of paper feed
035 Image Overlay
036 Copy Merge
042 User Stamp Repeat
043 Preset Stamp
044 User Stamp
045 Date Stamp
046 Page Numbering
051 Sort
052 Rotate Sort
7305 Multiple Copy Job Counter
001 1 to 1 Displays the job count for each multiple copy mode
002 1 to 2-5
003 1 to 6-10
004 1 to 11-20
005 1 to 21-50
006 1 to 51-99
7306 Number of Jobs per Mode
001 Sample Copy Displays the job count for each mode.
002 Partial Copy
003 Sort/Rotate Sort
7401 Total SC Counter Displays the total SC count as a 4-digit number.
7403 SC History
001 Latest Displays the latest 10 SC codes.
002 Latest 1st
003 Latest 2nd
004 Latest 3rd
005 Latest 4th
006 Latest 5th
007 Latest 6th
008 Latest 7th
009 Latest 8th
010 Latest 9th
7501 Total Jam Counter Displays the total paper jam count (copy paper and original)
as a 4-digit number.
7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total paper jam count (copy paper) as a 4-digit
number.
7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total paper jam count (original) as a 4-digit
number.
7504 Paper Jam Counter by Location
001 At Power On Displays the jam count for each location.
003 Roll Lead Edge Sensor 1: For 001~034: Paper fails to activate the sensor (non-feed).
Not On
004 Roll Lead Edge Sensor 2:
Not On
Not On
011 Cutting Sensor 1: Not On
012 Cutting Sensor 2: Not On
013 Registration Sensor: Not On
015 Exit Sensor: Not On
B010 5-46 SM

7504 016 Upper Exit Sensor: Not On Displays the jam count for each location.
034 By-pass Feed Sensor: Not For 001~034: Paper fails to activate the sensor (non-feed).
On
053 Roll Lead Edge Sensor 1: 053~084: Paper fails to move from sensor location.
Not Off
Not Off
Not Off
061 Cutting Sensor 1: Not Off
062 Cutting Sensor 2: Not Off
063 Registration Sensor: Not Off
065 Exit Sensor: Not Off
066 Upper Exit Sensor: Not Off
084 By-pass Feed Sensor: Not
Off
7505 Original Jam Counter by Jam Location
001 During Standby Displays the jam count for each location.
032 Registration Sensor: Not On
033 Registration Sensor: Not
Detect Off
034 Registration Sensor: Not Off
038 Stays Original/Paper
040 Emergency Stop Original
Feed
041 Exit Sensor: Not On
7506 Copy Jam Counter by Paper Width
096 914 mm Displays the jam count for each paper width.
097 841 mm
Service
Tables
098 594 mm
099 420 mm
100 297 mm
101 210 mm
102 660 mm
104 880 mm
105 800 mm
106 728 mm
107 565 mm
108 364 mm
109 257 mm
110 182 mm
128 Other
225 36 inch
226 24 inch
227 18 inch
228 12 inch
229 9 inch
230 30 inch
234 34 inch
235 22 inch
236 17 inch
237 11 inch
238 8.5 inch
SM 5-47 B010

7507 Jam History
001 Copy Latest Displays the latest 10 jams.
002 Copy Latest 1st
003 Copy Latest 2nd
004 Copy Latest 3rd
005 Copy Latest 4th
006 Copy Latest 5th
007 Copy Latest 6th
008 Copy Latest 7th
009 Copy Latest 8th
010 Copy Latest 9th
011 Original Latest
012 Original Latest 1st
013 Original Latest 2nd
7507 014 Original Latest 3rd Displays the latest 10 jams.
015 Original Latest 4th
7801 ROM Version
001 SCU Displays the ROM serial numbers.
002 BICU
003 LCDC
004 CSS (PI) (Japan Only)
005 HDC
006 Scanner
007 Printer
7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM counter.
7804 PM Counter Clear To clear the PM counter, press Start (SP7803).
7807 Jam/SC Counter Clear To clear the Jam/SC count to 0, press Start.
7808 Counter Clear To clear non-accounting counters to 0, press Start.
The following counters are not cleared: total counter
(electronic counter), copy counter, print counter, P/O
counter, C/O counter.
7810 Key Operator Code Clear To clear the key operator code, press Start.
Nullifies the key operator code.
7811 Original Counter Clear To clear the original counters, press Start (SP7002)
7816 Total Sheet by Roll Counter Clear
001 1st Roll Clears the copy counter for each roll (SP7204)
002 2nd Roll
003 3rd Roll
005 By-pass feed
7819 Total Sheet Count by Paper Width Press Start to clear the copy counter for each roll width
Clear (SP7101)
7822 Total Sheet Count by Reproduction To clear the copy counters for SP7301 reproduction modes,
Ratio Clear press Start.
B010 5-48 SM

7825 Total Feed Meter Clear To clear the electronic total counter, press Start: This can
only be done under the following conditions.
1. The counter displays a negative value (the counter does
not display a value from 0 to 9999999)
2. The counter has not been cleared before (clearing the
counter makes it display a value from 0 to 9999999)
This SP mode does not show whether the counter can be
cleared. Check the initial settings counter to make sure if
this is possible.
When the electronic counter exceeds 0, the mechanical
total counter synchronously starts counting. (The initial
value of the mechanical total counter is 0.)
7904 Total Sheet Count by Copy Mode To clear the counter of the total copies by copy mode, press
Clear Start (SP7304).
7905 Multiple Copy Job Count Clear To clear the counter of the copy job number of each
multiple copy mode, press Start (SP7305).
7906 Copy Mode Scanning Count Clear To clear mode scan count, press Start (SP7202).
7907 Number of Jobs per Mode Clear To clear number of jobs per mode, press Start (SP7306).
7908 Copy Mode Original Counter Clear To clear copy mode original count, press Start (SP7002
002, 007).
7917 Original Counter Clear To clear the original counter, press Start (SP7002).
Service
Tables
SM 5-49 B010
FIRMWARE HISTORY Rev. 05/2002
5.10 FIRMWARE HISTORY

5.10.1 B010-FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SERIAL FIRMWARE
FIRMWARE LEVEL VERSION
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION NUMBER
BICU SCU
First Production B0105162 A B0105172 A Initial 6.00
Production
⇒ 1. SP4960 005,006 (HDD Spindle
Control) setting changed
B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
Symptom:
When HDD Spindle Control is
disabled (default), SC980 may
occur just after the machine
recovers from Auto Off / Panel Off.
Cause:
When the machine is brought out of
these modes, it is able to warm up
quicker than when the main power
is turned on, and therefore checks
the HDD status at an earlier point.
However since the HDD must
warm up from a stop, it does not
reach ready speed in time and a
mainframe/HDD communication
error occurs.
Solution:
The default setting for HDD Spindle
Control (SP4960-005, 006) has
been changed from
Off ! On, which keeps the HDD
rotating constantly.
Note: When installing the HDD option
in the following machines, please
change the setting of SP4960-005
and 006 from Off ! On:
B010-27: J201060001 – J201060040
(40 units).
2. New UP mode added (Weekly
Output Volume)
To prevent toner scattering from the
development unit (see conditions
below), the “Weekly Output Volume”
setting has been added to System
Setting – General Features.
Continue…
B010 5-50 SM
Rev. 05/2002 FIRMWARE HISTORY
SERIAL FIRMWARE
BICU SCU
Symptom: B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
When customers use low duty mode
to make high-volume copy jobs
(relative to the ACV), the toner
concentration in the development unit
increases. This causes the
oversupplied toner to drop onto the
copies, especially under low
temperature conditions.
Solution:
Change the “Weekly Output Volume”
according to the customer’s average
weekly copy volume from inside
System Setting – General features:
Less than 750m (2,500 ft): Low duty
mode (default).
More than 750m (2,500 ft): High duty
mode
Action in the field:
Please instruct customers on the
following points at machine
installation:
Service
Tables
1) Method for how to enter UP Mode
and change the Weekly Output
Volume value.
2) For the first 1-2 months following
installation, have the customer keep
track of their copy volume at weekly
intervals. The weekly changes in CV
over this time will enable them to
decide which of the 2 settings is best
for them.
Note: For customers installing the

B010 as a replacement machine,
please use the weekly ACV on the
previous machine for reference and
set the Weekly Output Volume
accordingly (as a starting point).
Continue…
SM 5-51 B010
SERIAL FIRMWARE
BICU SCU
B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
3) During these first couple of months,
if the average weekly copy volume
exceeds 750m (2,500 ft), please have
the customer change the setting of
the Weekly Output Volume to “More
than 750m (2,500 ft)”.
Note: Please also check the total

counter value at PM visits, calculate
the weekly CV, and if necessary
change the Weekly Output Volume
setting.
3. 24-inch originals are recognized as

30-inch originals
When 30-inch paper is selected on
the operation panel, 24-inch originals
are automatically detected as 30-inch
originals.
4. “NRG A070” added to SP5907

(Plug & Display)
The model name NRG A070 has
been added as follows:
1: RICOH imagio Wide 7040 (Japan)
2: RICOH Aficio 470W
3: NRG A070
B010 5-52 SM
OVERVIEW
6. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MACHINE LAYOUT
1
3
8 4
5
7
B010D527.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
1 Image Writing Unit Uses an LPH (LED Print Head) capable of 32-level gradation to write
2-bit image data.
2 Scanner Unit Uses a CIS for 256-level scanning. To minimize black lines caused
by dust or other particles, the original is scanned from above.
3 Cleaning Unit The drum is cleaned with a counter blade.
4 Fusing Unit Fusing is done using a hot roller containing two halogen lamps. For
the given paper type/size selected by the user, the machine chooses
the most suitable fusing temperature and nip band width.
5 OPC Drum and The units located around the OPC drum do the charging, image
Surrounding Units writing, development, transfer, separation, cleaning, and quenching.
6 Roll Trays (2nd Tray Paper is supplied from continuous rolls.
optional)
7 By-pass Tray The by-pass tray can be used to feed individual sheets of copy
paper.
8 Development Unit Toner is attracted from a single magnetic roller to the low charge
areas on the OPC drum. The ID sensor inside the unit is used to
control the toner concentration.
SM 6-1 B010
OVERVIEW
6.1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
5 6 7 8 9
4 10
3
11
2 12
1
13
34
14
33
15
32
16
31
17
27
18
30
19
29 20
28 21
27 22
23
26
25 24
B010D527.WMF
23
B010 6-2 SM
OVERVIEW
1. Front Copy Tray 18. Hot Roller

2. OPC Drum 19. Copy Tray Guide
3. Original Table 20. Pressure Roller
4. Charge Corona Unit 21. Rear Copy Tray
5. Cleaning Unit 22. Transfer & Separation Corona Unit
6. Original Feed Rollers 23. Roll Holders
7. Upper Original Exit Guide 24. 2nd Feed Rollers
8. Original Exit Rollers 25. 3rd Feed Rollers
9. Upper Original Exit Rollers 26. 2nd Roll Tray (option)
10. Rolled-up Original Exit Tray 27. Cutter Units
11. Original Exit Junction Gate 28. 3rd Feed Exit Roller
12. Rear Original Tray 29. 1st Feed Rollers
13. White Platen Roller 30. 1st Roll Tray
14. Upper Exit Rollers 31. 1st/2nd Feed Exit Roller
15. Fusing Cleaning Roller 32. Registration Rollers
16. Paper Exit Junction Gate 33. Development Unit
17. Exit Rollers 34. Toner Cartridge
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-3 B010
OVERVIEW
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
2
7
3
6
B010V907.WMF
1. Original Feed Motor 5. Roll Feed Motor 1

2. Drum Drive Motor 6. Development Motor
3. Registration Motor 7. Fusing Drive Motor
4. Roll Feed Motor 2
B010 6-4 SM
OVERVIEW
6.1.4 ORIGINAL/COPY PAPER PATHS
Descriptions
B010D526.WMF
Detailed
A Paper path from the by-pass feed table

B Paper path from the 1st/2nd roll tray
C Paper path from the 3rd roll tray (option)
D Original paths
SM 6-5 B010
SCANNER
6.2 SCANNER
6.2.1 OVERVIEW CIS (Contact Image Upper exit
Upper exit
Sensor sensor roller
Registration
sensor
Original set Original feed
sensors rollers Exit sensor Exit roller
Original size
sensors
Original feed
clutch White platen roller
5.5 mm 30 mm
87 mm 61 mm 95.5 mm
B010D901.WMF
[B] [E]
[A]
Only one original can be placed in the
feeder at once.
The original size sensors and original set [D]
sensor detect paper size.
The original feed roller [A] feeds the [C]
original to the white platen roller and CIS
area [B].
The CIS scans the original.
While the scanned image is being
processed, the exit roller [C] feeds the
original out of the machine at either the
rear exit [D] or upper exit [E], depending
on which exit the user has selected.
B010D526.WMF
B010 6-6 SM
SCANNER
6.2.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Five sensors detect the original width; four original size sensors and the original set
sensor.
The sizes detected depend on the Original Size Detect user tool setting (see the
table below). In metric models, this is either A series or B series. In inch models, it
is either Engineering (ANSI) or Architecture.
The original set sensor detects A4 or B4 SEF and North American A size originals.
The original size sensors detect larger sizes.
Europe A Series A4 SEF A3 SEF A2 SEF A1 SEF A0 SEF
B Series B4 SEF B3 SEF B2 SEF B1 SEF —
North A B C D E
America Eng. (ANSI) 81/2 x 11" 11 x 17" 17 x 22" 22 x 35" 34 x 44"
Arch. 9 x 12" 12 x 18" 18 x 24" 24 x 36" 36 x 48"
SEF (short edge feed) = lengthwise, LEF (long edge feed) = sideways
6.2.3 ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM

The original feed motor [A] (stepper
[C]
motor) and timing belt [B] drive all the
rollers in the original feed path, including
the white platen roller [C].
The original feed clutch [D] controls the
original feed roller (on/off timing is based
on the output from the original set [B]
sensor).
[D]
[A]
Descriptions
B010D001.WMF
Detailed
6.2.4 ORIGINAL FEED SPEED

The speed of the original as it passes Original
Speed
through the original path increases as
the rate of reduction is lowered. 360 mm/s
90 mm/s
22.5 mm/s
400% 100% 25%

Reduction Ratio
B010D515.WMF
SM 6-7 B010
SCANNER
6.2.5 ORIGINAL TEMPORARY DELAY

[C]
Inserting the leading edge of the [B] [D]
original [A] into the feed slot switches [A]
on the original set sensor [B], and
brings it into contact with the edge of
the original feed roller [C].
The interval between the time the
original set sensor switches on until B010D551.WMF
the feed roller starts turning is called
Delay 1. It can be set from 1 to 5
seconds with the “Original Feed Delay 1” user tool. This delay allows the user to
manually shift the original from side to side to correct the alignment of the original.
After Delay 1 expires, the original is fed at 105 mm/s to the registration sensor [D],
where the original pauses again for 1 to 5 seconds. This is called Delay 2 and this
delay allows time for the user to pull the original out if it has fed incorrectly. The
length of Delay 2 can be set with the “Original Feed Delay 2” user tool.
6.2.6 SCANNING MECHANISM

In this machine, the scanning unit [A] is above
the original feed path [B]. This eliminates copy
quality problems caused by foreign objects [A]
falling into the scanner.
[B]
B010D103.WMF
This machine also uses a contact image

[A]
sensor [A] (CIS System !), which scans
black and white originals up to 926 mm
(361/2") wide at 600 dpi.
The original moves past the scanning unit.
[B]
So, to increase the scanning speed of this
machine, the CIS consists of 16 blocks of
self-focusing lenses [B] arrayed in a
straight line.
B010D902.WMF
B010 6-8 SM
SCANNER
6.2.7 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY CORRECTION

Auto Image Density Correction corrects
Contact Image Sensor (Center)
the background density. 70 mm 70 mm
The CIS reads the surface of the white 5 mm

platen roller and uses this reading (white
point =0) as a reference point for density
correction.
Texture detection Area
Next, the CIS starts 5 mm from the
leading edge and reads 70 mm to the left
and right of center to perform image
density correction line by line.
B010D514.WMF
6.2.8 ORIGINAL EXIT SWITCHING MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
B010D603.WMF
Original Junction Gate Original Junction Gate
Descriptions
Solenoid OFF Solenoid ON Detailed
An operation panel setting determines whether the original exits the upper exit [A]
or rear exit [B]. When the upper exit is selected, the solenoid stays off, and the
original exits at the upper exit. This is the default setting.
When the rear exit key is selected, the solenoid switches on when the registration
sensor detects the leading edge of the original, and the original exits at the rear [B].
SM 6-9 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.3.1 GENERAL IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW CHART
The IPU and the AMDP chips on the IPU board do the image processing.
MSU: Memory Supercharger Unit (hard disk with hard disk controller)
Signal from Contact Image Sensor
IPU Board
Sub Scan Magnification
OIPU
- Create standard data for white
shading correction
Shading Correction
- White shading correction processing
- Shading correction
- Background erase
Conversion - Main scan resolution conversion
- Main scan image shift
- Main scan magnification
- MTF filtering
- Smoothing
Filtering - Independent dot erasure
- Line width correction
AMDP
- Gamma correction
Image Processing - Binary processing
- 4-Value error diffusion
MSU - Dither processing Application
- Step gradation off
LPH
B010D512.WMF
B010 6-10 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.3.2 ORIGINAL MODES

Overview
Here is a brief summary of the original modes that the user can select for this
machine at the operation panel.
Mode Function
Text Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. When Text is selected, the
auto image density feature is automatically switched on.
Photo Conducts dither processing for photo originals to remove jagged
edges. Achieves the best reproduction for copied photographs. When
Photo is selected, the auto image density feature is automatically
switched off.
Text/Photo Achieves the best reproduction for originals with text and photos on
the same page. When Text/Photo is selected, the auto image density
feature is automatically switched on.
Pale Best reproduction of originals which may be difficult to read, such as
penciled documents, thin sheets, copies of copies of forms, and any
original of low contrast that may require enhancement. When Pale is
selected, the auto density feature is automatically switched on.
Generation Similar to the Text mode, but attempts to reduce the thickness of thick
characters, restore the thin or broken lines of originals, ignore the
background texture, and erase independent dots that tend to appear in
copies of originals which are 2nd, 3rd, etc. generation copies
themselves.
Patched Original Prevents the background from appearing in copies of originals where
the textures of the backgrounds differ. For example, this mode will
even out the backgrounds and eliminate the shadows and lines on
pages or boards pasted up for design layout.
Blue Line Ignores only blue lines in the original. For example, the blue grid
squares of graph paper, or the markings with a dropout blue pencil do
not appear in copies.
Photo Uses 4-value error diffusion. Good for copying posters that contain
(Hard Tone) photos with text overlays. 4-Value Error Diffusion is applied in the
Photo (Hard Tone) mode. It can be adjusted with SP4903 006 Image
Descriptions
Setting – Smoothing Filter Level Photo. Detailed
Tables on the following pages show which SP modes can be used for each original
mode. However, the following SP settings are only effective if the "Copier Features
- General Features - Original Mode Quality Level" user tool is set to "Special"
SP4903-006,
SP4906-020, -022, -024, -026, 028, -030, -032, -034, -037, -038, -039, -041,
-043, -045, -047, -049, -051, -053, -055, -056, -057, -058, -090, -091.
SM 6-11 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text Mode
Text mode does not distinguish between areas of the page that contain text,
graphics, or photographs; the entire page is processed as a text original. However,
straight lines appear sharp in the copies.
Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution
Processing Conversion
↓
Filtering SP4906-20, 24, 28, 32
MTF Filtering
MTF filter coefficients for various
Independent Dot Erasure
reproduction ratios.
Line Width Correction
SP4906-22, 26, 30, 34
MTF filter strength for various
reproduction ratios.
SP4905-4, 5, 6
Line width correction settings.
SP4930-2, 73, 74, 75
Independent dot erasure settings.
↓
Density Control γ Correction
↓
Quality
4-Value Error Diffusion
Processing
B010 6-12 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo Mode
Photo mode achieves the best possible copies of photo originals.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
Conversion Main Scan Resolution SP4906-37
Processing Conversion Smoothing coefficient.
↓
Filtering Smoothing SP4906-90
Switches the smoothing edge
coefficient on and off.
SP4906-91
Selection of the stored edge
threshold value for smoothing.
NOTE: Normally, SP 4906-90
and 4906-91 should not be
adjusted in the field.
↓
↓
Quality
Dither Processing
Processing
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-13 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
Text/Photo Mode
Text/Photo mode achieves excellent reproduction of originals with text and photos
on the same page. Grayscaling is more accurate than that obtained with Text
mode.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
Filtering SP4906-39, 43, 47, 51
MTF Filtering
MTF filter coefficients.
SP4906-41, 45, 49, 53
MTF filter strength.
SP4906-73, 74, 75
SP4930-3
SP4905-7, 8, 9
↓
↓
Quality
Processing
B010 6-14 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Pale Mode
Pale mode is designed to process images scanned from originals of low contrast
(thin originals, faded forms, etc.)
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4906-55
Independent Dot Erasure MTF filter coefficients.
SP4906-56
MTF filter strengths
SP4906-79, 80, 81
SP4930-4
↓
↓
Quality
Processing
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-15 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
Generation
Processing similar to that of the Text mode, but attempts to reduce the thick
characters, restore the thin or broken lines of originals, ignore the background
texture, and erase independent dots that tend to appear in copies of originals which
are themselves 2nd, 3rd, etc. generation copies.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
Independent Dot Erasure MTF filter coefficients.
Line Width Correction SP4906-58
MTF filter strengths.
SP4906-70, 71, 72
SP4930-1
SP4905-1, 2, 3
↓
↓
Quality
Processing
B010 6-16 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Patched Original Mode

The patched original mode processing prevents the background of an original from
appearing in a copy.
No SP’s are provided for this
Scanner Image image processing mode.
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
Filtering Background Erase
MTF Filtering
↓
↓
Quality
Processing
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-17 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
Blue Line Mode

Blue line mode processing ignores blue lines and markings on originals. For
example, blue grid squares of graph paper or markings with a dropout blue pencil
do not appear in copies.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
Filtering MTF Filtering SP4905-4, 5, 6
Independent Dot Erasure Line width correction settings.
↓
↓
Quality
Processing
NOTE: SP4906 092 adjusts the level for blue line erase.
B010 6-18 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
Photo (Hard Tone) Mode

Good for copying posters that contain photos with text overlays.
Scanner Image
Shading Correction
Correction
↓
↓
MTF filter coefficient
↓
↓
Quality SP4903-6
Processing 4-Value Error Diffusion Selects the level for 4-value
Error Diffusion.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-19 B010
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.3.3 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASURE

The user selects the required amount of independent dot erasure, using a user tool
(Copier Features – General Features – Noise Reduction). There are four settings:
Off, Low, Medium, and High.
The threshold values for each setting can be adjusted with SP modes 4906 70~81.
The user tool setting applies to the Text, Pale, Text/Photo, and Generation Copy
original modes. Independent dot erasure is also used with the Blue Line and
Patched Original modes, but there are no user or SP adjustments.
For example, Text mode uses the following SP modes.
• 4906 073: Low (L)
• 4906 074: Medium (M)
• 4906 075: High (H)
The adjustment is done on a 5 x 5 pixel matrix with the 10 pixels to the left and
right of the matrix.
SP4906 070~081 Independent Dot Erasure

0 Independent dot erasure is not executed.
1~14 When surrounding pixels are each less than the selected SP mode
value (nn), the targeted pixel is removed.
As shown in the table below, as values are selected farther to the right, more dots
are erased.
SP Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Text Mode 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 96 112 128 144
Example — — — — L — M — H — — — — —
L: Low, M: Medium, H: High
Target pixel
The surrounding area tested before application of independent dot erasure.
20 40 30 20 40
30 0 70 30 30
55 53 30 20 40 0 10 30 40 50 30 10 50 20 30 55 53 30 20 40 0 10 30 40 50
50 20 0 30 0
20 30 40 30 30
The algorithm operates as follows:

• If any value in the shaded is larger than the SP setting, the target pixel is not
removed.
• If no value in the pixels is greater than the SP setting, then the 10 pixels to each
side of the matrix are checked:
• If any value in the 10 pixels to each side of the matrix is larger than the target
pixel, the target pixel is not removed.
• If no value in the 10 pixels to each side of the matrix is greater than the SP
value, the target pixel is removed.
B010 6-20 SM
IMAGE PROCESSING
6.3.4 FOUR-VALUE ERROR DIFFUSION

This method of error diffusion, implemented for the first time on a wide format
copier, is similar to 256-grayscale error diffusion but with one important difference.
Instead of testing each matrix and assigning it a value on the 0~255 scale, each
matrix is tested and then processed according to which one of 4 ranges it fits into
on the 0~255 scale.
The 0~255 scale is divided into 4 sections. Sections 1, 2,
3, and 4 are assigned binary values (00, 01, 10, 11) in
ascending order.
This method of error diffusion is not as accurate as true
error diffusion. However, it requires much less memory,
resulting in much faster processing times and less
demand on memory resources. B010D513.WMF
This feature is only used with Photo (Hard Tone) Mode.

The strength can be adjusted with SP4903 006.
6.3.5 MTF SETTINGS

The MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) filter coefficient and strength can be
adjusted for the following requirements:
• Sharp reproduction of text and lines on the same page.
• Sharp lines in copies reduced in size.
• Removal of rough textured background.
• Improved reproductions of low-contrast originals.
The settings for an MTF filter coefficient and strength can be adjusted separately,
in order to achieve optimum performance according to how the customer is
routinely using the machine.
Descriptions
Detailed
If higher values are selected for both the coefficient and strength settings, the
performance of the filter is enhanced. If the strength of the filter is increased, the
reproduction of low contrast documents is improved but the occurrence of moiré
increases.
NOTE: For Photo (Hard Tone) Mode (4-Value Error Diffusion) the strength can be
increased only with SP4903 006 (Image Setting – Smoothing Filter Level
Photo).
For more details about the range of SP adjustments available, see Section “5
Service Tables”.
SM 6-21 B010
AROUND THE DRUM
6.4 AROUND THE DRUM

6.4.1 OVERVIEW
2
1
3
10
5
9 8 7
B010D102.WMF
1. LPH (LED Print Head) 6. Pick-off Pawl

2. Charge Corona Unit 7. Separation Corona Unit
3. Quenching Lamp (LED Array) 8. Transfer Corona Unit
4. Charge Corona Grid Wires 9. Registration Rollers
5. Cleaning Blade 10. Development Roller
Drum diameter φ80 mm (3.2")

Drum speed 90 mm/s
LPH 3 arrays, each array the same width as one A3 sheet
Corona wire Gold-plated to facilitate cleaning and minimize charge leak.
B010 6-22 SM
AROUND THE DRUM
6.4.2 DRUM DRIVE

The drum drive motor [A] drives the OPC
drum [B] through gears, a timing belt, and [B]
the drum drive pulley [C].
The drum drive motor only drives the
drum.
[C]
[A] B010D201.WMF
6.4.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT

The charge corona unit [A] comprises one
gold-plated charge wire (φ80 µm) and 10 [A]
grid wires, and employs the Scorotron
(Negative) Charge Method !.
About –6.0 kV are applied to the charge
wire, to achieve a –850V charge on the
grid wires. Charge passing between the
grid wires brings the charge on the
surface of the drum to –900V.
[B]
Descriptions
B010D202.WMF
6.4.4 CORONA WIRE CLEANING Detailed
The charge corona wire has an automatic [A]

cleaning device. After 600 m of paper has
passed though the machine or the current
copy job ends, the wire cleaner [A] cleans [A]
the wire.
The wire cleaner motor [B] drives the
cleaner.
The interval between automatic charge
wire cleanings can be adjusted with
B010D207.WMF
SP2804.
SM 6-23 B010
AROUND THE DRUM
6.4.5 CLEANING THE DRUM

This machine uses a counter blade
system to clean toner from the [A]
photoconductive surface of the drum. !
In a counter blade system, the cleaning
blade [A] is mounted opposed to the
direction of drum rotation.
B010D310.WMF
The counter blade has a pressure

release lever, which can be moved [A]
easily between the opened [A] and
closed [B] position to release it from the
drum. The blade must be released
before the drum is removed from the [B]
machine.
B010D311.WMF
B010 6-24 SM
AROUND THE DRUM
6.4.6 COLLECTING USED TONER

The toner collection coil [A], driven by the
registration motor, collects the used toner [A]
from the drum and sends it through a tube
[B] to the used toner tank.
The toner overflow sensor [C] monitors the
level of the toner in the used toner tank [D], [B]
and triggers a warning message on the [C]
operation panel when the used toner tank is
almost full.
[D]
The capacity of the used toner tank is 4600
cc (about 25.3 k copies/A1 sideways [LEF]
or 15 km at 6% coverage)
• After the near overflow warning, the B010D206.WMF
machine can continue to operate and will
copy up to 20 m.
• After the 20 m copies are completed, the
overflow warning is issued and copying
can no longer be done. If the 20 m limit is
exceeded during a copy job, the copy job
is terminated and a message will be
displayed on the operation panel.
• To release the machine from the overflow
shutdown, first turn the main power
switch off/on. If the message does not
appear after 1 second, you can continue
to use the machine. However, if the
message appears again, the used bottle
must be emptied.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-25 B010
AROUND THE DRUM
6.4.7 QUENCHING
[A]
This machine uses an LED array [A] for
quenching !.
This LED uses red light to reduce drum
fatigue.
6.4.8 ANTI-CONDENSATION B010D203.WMF
HEATERS
[C]
There are two anti-condensation heaters [A]
below the transfer and separation corona
units [B]. They prevent the formation of
condensation in areas around the OPC
drum [C].
The anti-condensation heaters turn on
when the main power switch is turned off.
[A]
B010D204.WMF
[B]
B010 6-26 SM
IMAGE WRITING
6.5 IMAGE WRITING

6.5.1 LED HEADS
[A]
This machine uses LED heads [A] that
shine light directly onto the OPC to form a
latent image with 32 levels of gradation.
B010D102.WMF
The A0-size 600-dpi print head is an array

of connected self-focusing lenses [A] [A]
above an LED array [B] and drive board
[C], and mounted in a heat sink [D].
NOTE: The maximum operational width
of the print head is 930 mm
[B]
(36.6").
[C]
The unit is called the LPH (LED Print
Head).
Descriptions
[D] Detailed
B010D101.WMF
SM 6-27 B010
DEVELOPMENT
6.6 DEVELOPMENT
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
11 1 2
3
4
10
9
5
8
6
7
B010D309.WMF
1. Development Filter 7. Paddle Roller

2. Auger 8. Development Agitator
3. Doctor Blade 9. Toner Agitator
4. Development Entrance Seal 10. Toner Cartridge
5. OPC Drum 11. Separator
6. Development Roller (with sleeve)
This machine uses the dual component development method with toner
concentration control !.
The paddle roller picks up developer in its paddles and transports it to the
development roller. Internal permanent magnets in the development roller attract
the developer to the development roller sleeve.
The rotation of the sleeve carries developer toward the OPC drum. Developer back
spill from the doctor blade goes either to the separator then the developer agitator,
or to the auger then the paddle roller.
A filter relieves the pressure that tends to build up in the development unit.
The toner density is constantly monitored by an ID sensor (there is no TD sensor).
B010 6-28 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.2 DEVELOPER CROSS-MIXING [C]

The doctor blade [A] trims the developer [A]
to the specified thickness. The developer
then passes to the separator [B]. The [B]
separator guides the developer at an [D]
angle, so that it cross mixes from left to
right.
Toner falls through a hole [C] at the right
end of the separator. The auger [D]
transports this toner in the opposite B010D301.WMF
direction of the separator, from right to left,
to achieve cross-mixing.
Together with toner density control, this
method of cross-mixing prevents
fluctuations in toner density, which can
cause uneven printing.
The rotation of the toner agitator [A] [C]

[A]
sends new toner to the developer
agitator [B], where it is mixed with
developer back spill from the
separator [C] and sent to the
paddle roller [D].
Descriptions
[B] Detailed
[D]
B010D306.WMF
SM 6-29 B010
DEVELOPMENT Rev. 04/2002
6.6.3 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

Copying
The CBG (Charge, Bias, Grid) power pack
applies [A] a negative bias (-700V) to the
development roller, slightly higher than the
residual charge on the drum.
The development bias during copying
depends on SP 2201 001.
[A]
Making ID Sensor Patterns
The machine has two ways of making the
ID sensor patterns. These are Low Duty
Mode and High Duty Mode. The mode
B010D904.WMF
used depends on SP 2201 004.
If the average copy volume is high (2.5
km/month or more), switch to High Duty to
prevent toner scattering.
However, if the machine is in High Duty Mode and the average copy volume
⇒ becomes low again the image density may decrease. If this happens, switch back
to Low Duty Mode.
The ID sensor pattern development bias voltages for high and low duty modes can
be adjusted with SP 2201 002 and 003, as shown in the following table.
Development bias for the ID sensor Default setting: -410 V

2201 002
pattern (Low Duty Mode)
2201 003
pattern (High Duty Mode)
Selects Low Duty Mode or High Duty Default setting: Low Duty
2201 004
Mode Mode
B010 6-30 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MECHANISM

The development motor [A] drives the
development unit through a timing belt [B].
[B]
[A]
B010D303.WMF
6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

The toner agitator [A] rotates [A]
inside the toner cartridge to
move toner to the development
unit agitator [B].
The amount of toner supplied to
the development unit is
controlled by switching the toner
supply clutch on and off. Clutch
on/off timing is based on
readings from the ID sensor.
[B]
Descriptions
Detailed
6.6.6 ID SENSOR B010D306.WMF
[A]
The ID sensor [A] checks the density of a
temporary image (known as the ID sensor
pattern), projected onto the drum with the
LED print head.
The density is used to determine whether
more toner is needed.
The ID sensor pattern is made after each
copy, if 100 cm of copies have been made
since the last ID sensor pattern check.
This interval can be changed with SP3920
B010D905.WMF
(ID Sensor Timing).
SM 6-31 B010
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.7 TONER END/NEAR-END CONTROL

Near-end Detection
Near-end occurs if the ID sensor reads Vsp/Vsg values three times in succession
that are larger than the Vend value specified with SP2927 001 (Toner End Level),.
End Detection/Recovery from Near-end
After the machine enters the near-end status, the ID sensor pattern check
accelerates from 100 cm to 20 cm intervals.
Then, the machine changes status in accordance with the following conditions:
• Toner End: Toner end occurs if Vsp/Vsg stays continuously more than Vend
while a certain length of paper is printed. Then the toner end message is
displayed, and machine operation halts. The length of paper depends on SP
2927 002 (default setting: 1500 cm).
If Vsp/Vsg drops below Vend, the distance count stops. But, if the next Vsp/Vsg
reading exceeds Vend again, the count begins again from the previously
accumulated total.
• Recovery from Near-end: If Vsp/Vsg drops below Vend three times in

succession, then the following happens:
• The machine is released from the near-end status
• The distance counter is reset to zero
• The ID sensor pattern check interval is restored to its original value (this
interval depends on SP3920; the default is 100 cm intervals).
B010 6-32 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.8 TONER END RECOVERY

The flowchart below illustrates the toner end recovery cycle.
Toner end recovery entails opening the toner hopper cover when the near toner or
toner end messages are displayed, then closing the cover after replacing the toner
cartridge.
If the toner cartridge is replaced during a long print job, the job can be restarted by
pressing the restart key.
Toner end Indicator lights, *1 K = SP2928 002 Toner End Recovery

toner hopper cover opened. Setting-Recovery Detction Setting
Closed after machine halts (Default: 12)
*2 Vres refers to the SP2928 001 Toner
End Recovery Setting - Recovery Level
(Default: 0.175)
Toner supply clutch ON 1.5 s, *1
then OFF 3.5 s for k rotations.
Crossmixing 30 s
Create ID sensor pattern
No Toner supply clutch ON 1.5 s,

Vsp/Vsg < Vres *2
then OFF 3.5 s, 10 times
Yes
Creates ID sensor pattern
Descriptions
Detailed
Cancel toner end display *2

Vsp/Vsg < Vres
Yes
Toner and message displayed

again
B010D511.WMF
SM 6-33 B010
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.9 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

Overview
The machine controls toner density by switching the toner supply clutch on/off, with
on/off timing determined by the ID sensor readings from the sensor pattern on the
drum.
Toner Supply Modes
This machine has three toner supply modes. These are detect mode, fixed mode
(3%), and fixed mode (6%).
The mode that is used depends on the setting of SP 2208 003. The default is
detect mode.
In detect mode, the machine uses the ID sensor to control toner supply.
If the ID sensor breaks, SC code 353 is generated. The machine does not
automatically switch over to fixed supply mode.
If a spare sensor is not available, SP 2208 003 must be set to fixed mode. For
example, select fixed mode (3%) if the user’s copies are generally 3% black
coverage.
Then, after installing a new ID sensor, set SP 2208 003 back to detect mode.
B010 6-34 SM
DEVELOPMENT
6.6.10 DEVELOPMENT TIMING CHART

Tray 1 A1 (LEF), one original, two copies, drum speed: 90 mm/s)
0 10000 20000 30000
[MS]
0 26870
0 10290 18130 24330
10730 18570
23890
18380
18610 ~ 18830
Descriptions
Detailed
Cutting Sensor
B010D510.WMF
SM 6-35 B010
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
6.7 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION

6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1
2
5
22
6
7 21
8 20
9
19
10
11 18
12 10
17
13
B010V900.WMF
14 15 16
1. Registration Roller 12. Roll Lead Edge Sensor 3

2. By-pass Feed table 13. 3rd Feed Roller
3. Cutting Sensor 1 14. Paper End Sensor 3
4. Feed Exit Roller 1 15. Roll End Sensor 3
5. Cutter 1 (Upper Tray) 16. Paper End Sensor 1
6. Roll Lead Edge Sensor 1 17. Roll Tray 1 Safety Switch
7. 1st Feed Roller 18. 2nd Feed Roller
8. Roll Lead Edge Sensor 2 19. Paper End Sensor 2
9. Cutting Sensor 2 20. Roll Tray 2 Safety Switch
10. Feed Exit Roller 2 21. Roll End Sensor 2
11. Cutter 2 (Lower Tray) 22. Roll End Sensor 1
The paper feed section consists of two roll trays and the by-pass feed table. Each
paper source can be selected from the operation panel.
The first roll tray contains two rolls (roll 1 is at the front of the machine, and roll 2 is
towards the rear). The second roll tray (optional) contains one roll (roll 3).
B010 6-36 SM
Inserting the original starts the feed motor and the registration motor, and paper
feed begins. The paper is fed from the paper supply source, passes the feed exit
roller and is fed into the machine by the registration rollers.
The registration rollers halt temporarily to allow paper skew correction, and then
start again to feed the paper to the drum.
Next, the cutter cuts the paper after the specified paper length has been fed
(monitored by the cutting sensor). The starting time of the cutter depends on the
cutting mode selected at the operation panel (preset cut, synchro cut, or variable
cut).
After the last cut of a job, the feed roller reverses and returns the edge of the paper
to its home position away from the vertical part of the feed path. This ensures that
the paper path is not obstructed when paper feed starts for the next job.
6.7.2 PAPER HOLDER [A]

The racks [A] where the paper rolls are
mounted in the paper tray units are
adjustable to allow loading paper rolls of
different width.
B010D907.WMF
To load a paper roll, release the lever [A] [C]

on the paper holder [B] then insert the
Descriptions
holder into the end of the paper roll [C].
Detailed
Once the holder is in place, move the lever
to the lock position [D].
[A]
[B] [D] B010D711.WMF
SM 6-37 B010
6.7.3 PAPER WIDTH AND MEDIA TYPE SETTINGS

The machine does not detect the paper width or the type of media.
After a roll has been installed, the width and media type must be selected on the
operation panel screen, and special settings input with user tools, before printing
from that roll. These settings determine machine parameters, such as toner supply
and temperature and pressure in the fusing unit (☛ 6.10.4).
The Tray Paper Size display is selected with the User Tools, System Settings for
Europe [A] or North America [B].
[A] [B]
002-15D.WMF PAP_SIZ2.WMF
6.7.4 ROLL TRAY FEED MECHANISM [C]
Each tray has an independent motor that [A]

drives the feed rollers and exit rollers for
the tray.
The feed motor [A] and feed clutches [B]
are on the left side of the tray.
There are two knobs [C] attached to the
timing belts on the right side of the tray to
[B]
allow removal of paper jams manually.
B010D704.WMF
B010 6-38 SM
6.7.5 BY-PASS FEED MECHANISM

[A]
Inserting a cut sheet from the by-pass
feed table into the machine switches on [C]
the by-pass feed sensor [A].
The by-pass feed sensor switches on the
drum motor, registration motor [B] and the
registration clutch [C], and the paper starts
to move.
[B]
The registration clutch switches off
temporarily so the user can adjust the
B010D705.WMF
position of the paper. This delay time can
be adjusted with SP1911 (By-Pass Feed
Start Timing Adj.).
6.7.6 REGISTRATION
The registration motor [A] and registration
clutch [B] drive the registration roller [C].
[B]
When the paper arrives at the registration
roller, the registration clutch switches off
temporarily in order to remove any skew,
and then switches on again to resume
feed. [C]
B010D709.WMF
[A]
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-39 B010
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION Rev. 3/2002
6.7.7 CUTTING MECHANISM

There is a cutter unit on each roll tray. [A]
The rotary disk cutter [A] can cut in either
direction. When it comes to rest at the
home position [B] on either end of the
cutting unit, a cam opens the paper holder
for the next paper feed.
Before cutting, the registration roller
continues to rotate at normal speed, but
the roll feed motor speed increases [B]
slightly. This causes the paper to buckle
slightly between the registration roller and
the top of the cutter.
When the cutter motor switches on, the cutter starts to move. This closes the paper
clamp to hold the paper at the cutting position. The cutter disk pushes the paper
against a horizontal blade behind the paper, and moves across the paper, cutting
as it moves.
The registration roller continues to turn during cutting. At this time, the slack
generated between registration roller and cutter is taken up. This allows paper feed
past the drum to continue at the same speed during cutting.
To cut a sheet from a roll of freshly loaded paper, press the auto feed key for the
1st or 2nd roll to feed paper, then release the key to cut. Paper will continue to feed
for as long as the auto feed key is pressed.
The paper can also be cut by pushing the handle on the cutter to the left or right.
⇒ 6.7.8 PAPER ROLL REVERSAL

There is a roll lead edge sensor for each paper
roll. The sensors detect the presence of paper
in the guide below the cutter.
At the end of every copy job the paper roll
reverses to remove paper from the vertical
paper guide. This allows other paper rolls to be
selected. The roll lead edge sensors,
determine if paper has reversed far enough to
clear the vertical paper guide.
Roll Lead Edge
Sensors
B010 6-40 SM
Rev. 3/2002 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION
⇒6.7.9 ROLL END DETECTION [A]
Roll end is detected with reflective

photosensors that detect the
exposed, black core of an empty roll.
In the 1st roll tray unit, the
[C]
photosensors [A] are mounted above
the two paper rolls.
In the optional 2nd roll tray unit, the [B]
photosensor [B] is mounted in front
of the paper roll.
In addition to the photosensors, two
paper end sensors [C] are mounted in
the 1st roll tray, and one paper end B010D906.WMF
sensor [D] is mounted in the optional [D] [C]
2nd roll tray. These paper sensors
detect the end of the paper roll if the
core of the paper roll is any other color
than black and cannot be detected by
the photosensors.
⇒6.7.10 CONDENSATION PREVENTION

[B]
There are two anti-condensation heaters
[A] for each paper roll, and a heater switch [A]
[B] for each tray.
Normally the switch is set to OFF.
The anti-condensation heaters
Descriptions
OFF are powered off when the main
Detailed
power switch is powered off.
The anti-condensation heaters
ON turn on after the main power
switch is powered off.
[A]
B010D701.WMF
SM 6-41 B010
PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION Rev. 3/2002
⇒6.7.11 PAPER FEED TIMING CHART

Feed timing is controlled by the copy signal (original at the original registration
sensor, or when Start is pressed for a multi-copy job).
Feed Start Signal

from Scanner
Feed Gate Signal Paper Roll

Pulse Count Starts Reverse
Drum Motor,
Quenching Lamp
After 7.82 s OFF

Feed Clutch
Registration Motor
Acceleration
Before Cutting
After 0.77 s ON After 1.24 s OFF
Feed Motor
After 3.73 s ON
Registration Clutch
Cutting Sensor
Registration Sensor
Cutter Motor
Cutter HP Sensor
B010D554.WMF
B010 6-42 SM
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.8 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.8.1 OVERVIEW
The transfer corona unit [A] uses a
tungsten wire (φ80 µm) which at transfer
applies about +5 kV to transfer toner from
the drum to the paper.
The separation corona [B] applies about
ac 4.5 kV and dc +350V to separate the
paper from the drum.
[B]
[A] B010D102.WMF
6.8.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION TIMING CONTROL

SP2925 002 determines when the machine switches the transfer current over from
the current for the leading edge (relatively weak) to the current for the image
(relatively strong).
If there is insufficient toner transfer at the leading edge of the image, adjust this SP
so that the switchover point is earlier. However, this can cause paper separation at
the leading edge to be less effective.
Also, if paper separation at the leading edge is poor, adjust the SP so that the
switchover point is earlier. However, this can cause insufficient toner transfer at the
leading edge of the image.
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-43 B010
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
6.8.3 PICK-OFF PAWL OPERATION

The pick-off pawls separate paper from the
drum when the separation corona fails. [A]
The pick-off pawl solenoid brings the pick-
off pawls into contact with the drum.
When the leading edge of the paper on the
drum enters the separation corona unit with
about 198 mm (7.8") of the paper in contact
with the drum, the solenoid [A] switches on.
The pick-off pawl shaft starts to rotate, and
the pawls [B] attached to the shaft are held [B]
B010D205.WMF
against the drum by a spring.
B010 6-44 SM
PAPER TRANSPORT
6.9 PAPER TRANSPORT

[A]
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
The paper separated from the drum by the
separation corona unit goes to the
transport belt [A].
Suction from the transport fans [B] below
the separation transport tank [C] hold the
paper on the belt. Then, the belt transports [C]
the paper to the fusing unit.
NOTE: The transport fans [B] also cool the
fusing unit, even when the machine is in B010D708.WMF
[B]
standby mode.
The fusing motor drives the transport unit
and the fusing unit.
[A]
An ozone filter [D] at the exhaust port

reduces the amount of ozone that is
released from the machine.
[D]
[B]
B010D707.WMF
Descriptions
Detailed
SM 6-45 B010
FUSING UNIT
6.10 FUSING UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW
1 2
11
3
10
9
5
6
8
7
B010D509.WMF
1. Hot Roller 7. Pressure Release Lever

2. Fusing Cleaning Roller 8. Pressure Roller
3. Hot Roller Strippers 9. Fusing Lamps
4. Pressure Roller Strippers 10. Thermofuse
5. Pressure Roller Thermistor 11. Hot Roller Thermistor
6. Fusing Pressure Motor
B010 6-46 SM
FUSING UNIT
Hot roller: Extremely thin (1.6 mm) with two fusing lamps.
Hot roller: 120V Version 220 ~ 240V Version
Main 1300W 700W
195°C (383°F) Sub 300W 700W
143°C (289°F)
120V Version: Both Main (1300W) and Sub (300W)
fusing lamps light to attain the ready temperature of
143°C (289°F) within 120 s. Then, the sub fusing lamp
switches off. The sub lamp is used only during warm-
up. To maintain the control temperature, only the
B010D559.WMF
main lamp is used.
220 ~ 240V Version: Both lamps switch on until the
ready temperature is attained. Then, both lamps
switch on and off to maintain the control temperature.
Pressure roller thermistor Contacts the pressure roller to monitor pressure roller
temperature.
Cleaning roller Mounted above the hot roller to clean the hot roller
and prevent offset.
Pressure roller After the ready temperature is attained, more
pressure is applied to compensate for low
temperatures until the control temperature is reached.
CPM Down Control The basic fusing motor speed depends on paper size
and type.
However, to maintain the control fusing temperature,
the CPU reduces the copy speed if the fusing
temperature falls too far during copying.
Descriptions
CPM: Copies Per Minute
Detailed
SM 6-47 B010
FUSING UNIT
6.10.2 FUSING PRESSURE CONTROL MECHANISM

The spring loaded pressure levers [A] [D]
mounted on the pressure roller shaft [B]
[C] [E]
force the pressure roller [C], a silicone
rubber roller, against the hot roller [D]
above.
[B]
The pressure of this spring can be
adjusted. For details, see “Hot Roller and
Pressure Roller” in Section 3.
The fusing temperature and amount of
pressure applied by the pressure roller is [A]
adjusted for the paper in use. Two stepper
motors [E] are provided on either end of B010D501.WMF
the pressure roller. The fusing pressure
motors are controlled with SP settings that
determine the amount of pressure applied
by the pressure roller on the hot roller
above.
SP1914 002 Right Pressure Adjustment

SP1914 003 Left Pressure Adjustment
If a jam occurs, the left and right fusing pressure stepper motors reverse to release
the pressure on the rollers and the gears in the fusing unit. The fusing unit powers
down when the paper exit cover or the upper unit are opened to ensure safe
removal of the jammed sheet.
B010 6-48 SM
FUSING UNIT
6.10.3 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE CONTROL

The fusing pressure is automatically adjusted, so
nip-band width is not required.
During warm-up and during printing, the pressure
roller thermistor [A] monitors the temperature of [A]
the pressure roller to determine the target control Hot Roller
hot roller temperature. (☛ Table 6-1)
The hot roller thermistor [B] monitors the actual [B]
temperature of the hot roller, and the CPU
determines the difference between the actual
temperature and the target control temperature.
Based on this data, the pressure on the hot roller
[C] is increased or decreased, until the leading Pressure Roller
edge of the paper reaches the fusing unit. (☛
Table 6-2)
If the hot roller temperature drops below a certain
level during printing, the CPU uses CPM Down [C]
Control to reduce the hot roller speed. (☛ Table 6-
3)
B010D560.WMF
Table 6-1 Pressure Roller and Hot Roller Temperature

PLAIN PAPER
Pressure Roller Temp. Target Hot Roller Temp.
Temp. Control 1 Below 117.5°C 195°C
168°C ~ 117.5°C -0.6667X + 273.33°C
Above 168.5°C 161°C
96.5°C ~ 156.5°C -0.6667X + 259.33°C
Descriptions
Above 156.5°C 194.5°ºC Detailed
Temp. Control 3 Below 70°C 194.5°C
70ºC ~ 125°C -0.0048X2 + 0.3086X + 196.42°C
Above 125°C 160°C
96.5°C ~ 156.5°C -0.6667X + 237.33°C
Above 111.5°C 163°C
X: Pressure roller temperature
SM 6-49 B010
FUSING UNIT
Table 6-1 (cont.)

TRACING PAPER
Pressure Comments
Target Hot Roller Temp.
Roller Temp.
Temp. Control 1 Idling: Control
Above 841 mm (W) Entire area 205°C temp for pressure
Below 840 mm (W0 Below 160°C 205°C roller is 145°C ~
160°C~185°C -0.0243X2+7729X -256.73°C 160°C*1
185°C 156°C
Temp. Control 2
Above 841 mm (W) Entire area 195°C Idling: Control
Below 840 mm (W0 Below 150°C 195°C temp for pressure
150°C~175°C -0.179X2+4.66072–102.86°C roller is 115°C ~
130°C*2
Above 175°C 165°C
Temp. Control 3
Above 841 mm (W) Entire area 195°C No idling control.
Below 840 mm (W0 Below 150°C 195°C
150°C~175°C -0.0179X2+4.6607X-102.86°C
Above 175°C
Temp. Control 4
Entire area 165°C
X: Pressure roller temperature

*1
When copying starts with tracing paper with Temperature Control 1, the target
hot roller temperature is 205°C and the target pressure roller temperature is
above 145°C.
*2
When copying starts with tracing paper with Temperature Control 2, the target
hot roller temperature is 195°C and the target pressure roller temperature is
above 115°C.
B010 6-50 SM
FUSING UNIT
Table 6-2 Adjustment for Actual/Target Temperature Difference

If the temperature difference is above 15°C, the machine must make an adjustment
to the benchmark pressure settings in Table 6.10.4. The following table shows the
required adjustment.
Temp.
Plain Paper Tracing Paper Film
Difference
Above 30°C +55N +20N +55N
15°C~30°C +15N +10N +15N
1
Below 15°C 0N 0N 0N
“N” means “Newton”
• This correction is done at the start of every page.

• The fusing temperature when the print start (F-gate) signal is issued at the start
of each page determines the initial correction from the pressure roller motors.
The temperature difference is monitored and the pressure is continuously
adjusted until the leading edge of the media reaches the fusing unit. Then, the
pressure is fixed at the current level while printing that page.
Table 6-3 CPM Down

When the fusing temperature drops, the CPU reduces the copy speed. This
ensures that the fusing temperature is high enough to fuse the toner properly,
especially for long print jobs.
PLAIN PAPER, FILM
CPM Down 1 CPM Down 2 CPM Down 3,4,5 CPM
Hot Above 160°C Above 155°C Above 155°C Base CPM
Roller 150°C~160°C 145°C~155°C 142°C~150°C Base CPM*0.75
Temp.
Below 150°C Below 145°C Below 142°C Base CPM*0.38
Descriptions
TRACING PAPER
CPM Down 1 CPM Down 2 CPM Down 3,4 CPM Down 5 CPM Detailed
Hot Above 175°C Above 170°C Above 166°C Above 155°C Base CPM
Roller 165°C~175°C 160°C~170°C 155°C~166°C 145°C~155°C Base CPM x 0.75
Temp.
Below 165°C Below 160°C Below 155°C Below 145°C Base CPM x 0.38
SM 6-51 B010
25 May, 2001 FUSING UNIT
6.10.4 FUSING CONTROL SETTING TABLE

This is a summary of the user tool settings (System Settings – General Features – Fusing Adjustment: Paper Tray).
Table 1: Plain Paper (Roll Paper, By-pass Feed)
Mode 1 (Thick) Mode 2 Mode 3 (Default) Mode 4 Mode 5 (Thin)
Fusing line speed Plain paper speed 1 Plain paper speed 1 Plain paper speed 1 Plain paper speed 2 Plain paper speed2
Fusing pressure 95N (248 steps) 85N (311 steps) 75N (374 steps) 65N (436 steps) 55N (499 steps)
Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp.
Fusing temperature Plain paper: Temp. Control 4
Control 1 Control 2 Control 3 Control 3
Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM
CPM Down Control Plain paper: CPM Down 5
Down 1 Down 2 Down 3 Down 4
2 2 2 2 2
Media 110g/m 90g/m 70g/m 60g/m 50g/m
Table 2: Tracing Paper (With the exception of line speed, same conditions as for as roll paper, by-pass feed)
Fusing line speed
Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 2 Tracing paper speed 2
(roll paper)
Fusing line speed
Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 1 Tracing paper spd 2 Tracing paper speed 3
(by-pass feed)
Tracing paper: Tracing paper: Tracing paper: Tracing paper:
Fusing temperature Tracing paper: Temp. Control 3
Temp. Control 1 Temp. Control 2 Temp. Control 3 Temp. Control 3
Tracing paper: CPM Tracing paper: CPM Tracing paper: CPM Tracing paper: CPM
CPM Down Control Tracing paper: CPM Down 5
2 2 2 2
Media 70~90g/m 70~80g/m 70~80g/m 50~70g/m Very Thin
Table 3: Film (Roll Paper, By-pass Feed)
Fusing line speed Film speed 1 Film speed 1 Film speed 1 Film speed 2 Tracing paper speed2
Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp. Plain paper: Temp.
Fusing temperature Plain paper: Temp. Control 4
Control 1 Control 2 Control 3 Control 3
Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM Plain paper: CPM
CPM Down Control Plain paper: CPM Down 5
Media Thickness: 0.07mm ~ 0.095 mm Thin Very Thin
B010 6-52 SM
Rev. 04/2002 FUSING UNIT
6.10.5 HOT ROLLER CLEANING

The cleaning roller [A] is diagonally
above the hot roller, and presses [A]
slightly against the hot roller [B] to
maintain constant contact. It is coated
with material saturated with silicone oil.
To prevent the oil from streaking, at the
start of rotation, the hot roller reverses
[B]
briefly to wipe its surface against the
cleaning roller.
The hot roller and pressure roller [C] [C]
both have stripping pawls.
B010D504.WMF
6.10.6 HOT ROLLER THERMOFUSE

[B]
⇒ Non-contact thermofuses (rated
for 192°C [A] and 216°C [B])
near the hot roller [C] prevent
accidental overheating which
may lead to a fire hazard.
[A]
[C]
Descriptions
Detailed
6.10.7 FUSING UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM [C]

The fusing motor (a stepper motor) [A]
drives the fusing unit, the transport belt,
and the paper exit unit via one gear train
[B] and two timing belts [C].
[B]
[A]
B010D506.WMF
SM 6-53 B010
FUSING UNIT
6.10.8 WRINKLE PREVENTION
[A]
[B]
[C] B010D550.WMF
The speed of the paper at the fusing rollers [A] is slightly faster than at the
registration rollers [B] to ensure that the correct amount of tension is maintained on
the paper [C] between the registration and fusing rollers. This prevents wrinkling in
the fusing unit.
However, after the paper leading edge is grabbed by the fusing unit, the paper
moves past the drum faster than previously, which could enlarge the image slightly
in the sub scan direction. To prevent this, both the registration and fusing motors
slow down slightly (by the same amount) when the leading edge of the paper
reaches the exit sensor.
The distance between the registration roller and exit sensor is about 360 mm
(14.2"), so this motor speed correction is only used when paper is longer than 360
mm.
B010 6-54 SM
PAPER EXIT
6.11 PAPER EXIT

6.11.1 OVERVIEW
After the paper passes through the fusing unit, it is fed to the paper exit. The paper
exit section contains a jam sensor (the exit sensor).
6.11.2 PAPER EXIT DRIVE

The paper exit section is driven by the
fusing motor [A], gear train [B], and [C]
timing belts [C].
[A]
[B]
B010D508.WMF
6.11.3 PAPER EXIT ACCESS

[A]
The paper exit cover [A] and the paper exit
guide plate [B] can be opened to make it
easier to remove jammed paper from the
fusing and exit sections.
Descriptions
Detailed
B010R902.WMF
SM 6-55 B010
PAPER EXIT
6.11.4 SWITCHING EXITS

Paper longer than A1 sideways paper
must exit at the rear, because the front
paper exit does not have a large tray.
[B]
Selecting the paper exit on the operation
panel switches the paper junction gate
solenoid [A] on and off to open and close
the junction gate [B], which selects the
paper exit path.
• Solenoid on: Rear exit
The machine does not automatically [A]

select the correct exit if the paper is longer B010D601.WMF
than A1 sideways. Change the exit

selection on the operation panel.
6.11.5 EXIT JAM DETECTION

The exit sensor [A] in front of the rear exit
rollers [B] detects paper jams.
[B]
[A]
B010D602.WMF
B010 6-56 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
6.12 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Motor Clutches
All Sensors Power Packs
and Solenoids
Left Fusing Pressure Operation

FPDB
Motor Panel
Right Fusing Pressure 1st Tray Sensor,

FPDB RFDB2
Motor Motor
IOB
AC 120 V 2nd Tray Sensor,
PSU RFDB1
220 - 240 V Motor
Anti-condensation
CSS
Heater
Fusing Lamps (2)

MCU VDB LPH
CIS
IPU
HDD1 HDD2 Stamp Board

I/F Board (Option)
(Option)
Controller PC (Option)
B010D552 WMF
6.12.1 MCU
The MCU (Main Control Unit) is the main board. It controls the entire machine and
Descriptions
system processing. Two CPUs are mounted on the MCU—one operates the SCU Detailed
software and the other the BICU software. Specifically:
• SCU (System Control Unit). Performs system control, scanner control,
operation panel control, and controls the BICU.
• BICU (Base Image Control Unit). Controls image processing in the IPU (Image
Processing Unit) and operation of the printer engine.
SM 6-57 B010
B010R901.WMF
NOTE: The DIP switch settings are provided for your reference only. They should
always be set OFF (default) and they should never be changed in the field.
MCU DIP SW Settings (Address: SW101) Yellow Knob

No. Function Default Comment
Image evaluation device data output. OFF No output
1 DFU OFF
ON Output
IPU debug mode. DFU OFF Normal mode (no debug)
2 OFF
ON Debug mode
AMDP operation mode selection. DFU OFF AMDP path
3 OFF
ON AMDP on
Error diffusion selection. DFU OFF Selective error diffusion
4 OFF
ON General error diffusion
CIS register setting. DFU OFF CIS function testing
5 OFF
ON CIS design testing
Not used
6 OFF
7 Not used OFF
Not used
8 OFF
B010 6-58 SM
MCU DIP SW Settings (Address: SW102) Orange Knob

1 Not used OFF
2 Not used OFF
Gate control for Text RXD. DFU OFF IC137-On
3 OFF
ON IC137-Off
Block operation, recognize IC card. DFU OFF SCU_IC-Card
4 OFF
ON BICU_IC-Card
Software switch input. DFU OFF Pull-up
5 OFF
ON Software switch press
6 Not connected OFF OFF Not defined
MCU DIP SW Settings (Address: SW103) Black Button

No. Push SW Default Comment
--- System reset --- Reset executes only when this button is pressed.
Pin Head Address: TB101, 3 Pins

Socket Insert Definition Default Comment
1-2 Pin OFF (normal) O
2-3 Pin Internal mode X Set for AMDP software download
6.12.2 IPU
Descriptions
Detailed
The IPU (Image Processing Unit) conducts image processing. This involves
processing image data from the CIS (Contact Image Sensors), sending it to the
VDB (Video Drive Board), and then to the LPH (LED Print Heads). The IPU also
controls the HDD unit and the printer board, and the printer control/scanner control
functions.
LED Sending Meaning Comment

LED 101 Green HDD 1 display Lights: Normal
LED 102 Green HDD 2 display Flashes: HDD standby
Printer FGATE output status Lights: Printer FGATE signal
LED 103 Orange
being sent
Original registration input status Lights: Original registration
LED 104 Green
signal being received
SM 6-59 B010
6.12.3 IOB
The IOB (Input/Output Board) controls each sensor, motor, solenoid, and high
voltage supply board. It also contains the drive circuits for these components. It
also performs process control, transfers serial data between the machine and
peripherals, and controls the fusing unit.
DIP SW Address: SW101 Yellow Knob

1 North America OFF ON Enables North American
Specifications (→ BICU)
2 Europe OFF ON Enables European
Specifications (→ BICU)
3 Jam Detection OFF OFF ON No jam detection (→ BICU)
4 SC Detection OFF OFF ON No SC display (→ BICU)
5 Not connected OFF --- ---
Not connected OFF --- ---
Pin Head Address: TB101, 3 Pins

Socket Insert Definition Default Comment
1-2 Pin Terminal (120Ω) X Independent circuit connection
present with machine, or not connected
2-3 Pin Terminal (120Ω) not O Relay circuit connection with
present machine
6.12.4 VDB
The VDB (Video Drive Board) controls the LPH. It processes the image information
sent from the IPU and sends it to the LPH.
6.12.5 RFDB
The RFDB (Roll Feed Drive Board) controls the motors, solenoids, and clutches
inside the paper tray.
6.12.6 FPDB
The FPDB (Fusing Pressure Drive Board) controls the two pressure roller motors
mounted at either end of the pressure roller.
B010 6-60 SM
Rev. 3/2002 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
6.12.7 PSU
The PSU (Power Supply Unit) supplies dc for every electrical component in the
machine, and controls ac input to the fusing lamps and anti-condensation lamps.
Fuses
Rating Blown Fuse
⇒
Load
Condition
Name Connector V
220 -
120 V
240 V
FU001 CN101, 20 A ---- AC AC drive input Dead
102, 103, 380 V section
104
FU002 CN103, 5A 5A AC Fusing lamps, anti- No Fault indicated
104 125 V 250 V condensation
heaters
FU101 --- 8A 5A AC AC power Dead
125 V 250 V
FU301 CN126-1 6.3 A 5A 24 V (1) IOB and 24 V SC391.001, Set
125 V 250 V safety system via safety paper roll 2
switch:
development motor,
CGB and TS power
packs
FU302 CN126-2 6.3 A 6.3 A 24 V (2) IOB and 24 V SC547.03
125 V 250 V safety system via safety
switch: drum motor,
fusing motor,
registration motor
FU303 CN126-3 6.3 A 6.3 A 24 V(3) IOB, FPDB, fusing Copies exit from
125 V 250 V pressure motor, rear only, P jam
pick-off pawl
solenoid, quenching
lamp, toner supply
clutch, registration
clutch, total counter,
Descriptions
key counter, key Detailed
card
FU304 CN126-4 6.3 A 6.3 A 24 V(4) IOB, operation No Op panel display
125 V 250 V panel, original feed
motor, original feed
clutch, original
junction gate
solenoid.
FU305 CN126-5 6.3 A 6.3 A 24 V(5) IOB, RFDB, 24 V Reset paper roll,
125 V 250 V for the roll trays Feed paper
Correctly
FU306 CN129-1 6.3 A 6.3 A 24 V(7) CIS Black Copies
125 V 250 V
SM 6-61 B010
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev. 3/2002 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
1. COPIER ENGINE
Configuration: Console
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Originals: Sheet
⇒ Original Image Size: Maximum: 914 x 6,000 mm (36" x 236")
(W x L) Max. through-put width: 950 mm (37")
Minimum: 210 x 182 mm (81/2" x 9")
Max Original Width: 950 mm (37.4")
Original Weight Rear Straight: 20.0 ~ 157 g/m² (5.32 ~ 41.7 lb.),
30 µm ~ 1.1 mm
Upper : 20.0 ~ 104.7 g/m² (5.3 ~ 27.8 lb.)
Document Roll: 52.3 ~ 104.7 g/m² (13.9 ~ 27.9 lb.)
Copy Paper Size: Maximum:
(W x L) Roll Feed : 914 x 6,000 mm (36" x 236") Rolls 1 to 3
Bypass feed: 914 x 2,000 mm (36" x 78")
Minimum:
1st/2nd Roll Feed: 210 x 210 mm (81/2" x 81/2")
Bypass Feed: 210 x 182 mm (81/2" x 9")
3rd Roll Feed (Option): 210 x 250 mm (81/2" x 10")
Copy Paper Weight 52.3 ~ 104.7 g/m² (13.9 ~ 27.9 lb.)
Copying Speed: 4 cpm (A0/E lengthwise)
(cpm: copies / minute) 7 cpm (A1/D sideways)
Photoconductor: Organic photoconductor drum
Reduction/Enlargement:
Inch Version
Metric Version
Engineering Arch.
Reduction 25,32,50,65 % 25,33,50,67% 25, 35, 50, 71%
100% 100 % 100 % 100%
Specifications
Enlargement 129,259,400 % 133,267,400 % 141, 200, 283, 400%

Zoom: 25 ~ 200% (0.1%/step)
200 ~ 400% (0.2%/step)
Resolution: Scanning 600 dpi, Printing 600 dpi
Gradation: Scanning: 256 levels
Printing: 4 levels
Warm-up Time: Within 2 minutes
(Room temperature 23°C, 120V: US, 230V: EU)
SM 7-1 B010
SPECIFICATIONS
First Copy Time:

Metric Version A1 sideways A0 lengthwise
1st Feed 18 s 25 s
2nd Feed 19 s 26 s
3rd Feed 21 s 28 s
Inch version D sideways E lengthwise
1st Feed 18.5 s 25.4 s
2nd Feed 19.5 s 26.4 s
3rd Feed 21.5 s 28.4 s
Copy Number Input: Ten-key pad, 1 to 99 (standard sizes only)
Copy Paper Capacity: Roll Feed: Max. Diameter: 175 mm (6.9")
Max. Length: 150 m (16.4 yds)
Roll Core Diameter: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm
(about 3")
Bypass Feed: 1 sheet
Output Tray Capacity: Front
99 sheets: A1 sideways (Plain paper)
10 sheets: A1 sideways (Application paper)
Rear
10 sheets: A0 lengthwise (Plain paper)
1 sheet: A0 lengthwise (Application paper)
Original Stack Capacity Rear Straight
1 sheet
Upper
50 sheets: A1 sideways (Plain paper)
20 sheets: A1 sideways (Application paper)
Document Roll
1 sheet
Application paper: Anything other than plain paper (for
example, film or tracing paper)
Memory Capacity: RAM: 160 MB
HDD: More than 4.3 GB x 2 (option)
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge exchange (800 g/cartridge)
Toner Yield: 2,200 copies
(A1 sideways, 6% full black, 1 to 99 copying, Text
mode)
Power Source: North America: 120 V, 60 Hz, 20A
Europe/Asia: 220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 10 A
B010 7-2 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Consumption 120V version

Mainframe Full system *¹
Warm-up 1.7 kW 1.7 kW
Ready *² 0.2 kW 0.2 kW
During Copying 1.4 kWh 1.4 kWh
Maximum 1.7 kW 1.7 kW
220 ~ 240V version
Mainframe Full system *¹
Warm-up 1.6 kW 1.6 kW
Ready *² 0.2 kW 0.2 kW
During Copying 1.5 kWh 1.5 kWh
Maximum 1.8 kW 1.8 kW
*¹ Full System:
Mainframe with 2nd Roll Tray, HDD, and Stamp
Board
*² Ready:
The anti-condensation heaters are switched off.
Noise Emission: The measurements were made in accordance with ISO
7779 at the operator position
Sound Power Level
Copier Only Full System
Stand-by 50.6 dB (A) 51.1 dB (A)
Copying 65.7 dB (A) 65.7 dB (A)
Copying (from
65.7 dB (A) 65.7 dB (A)
memory)
Maximum Power North America: Less than 1.7 kW
Consumption: Europe/Asia: Less than 1.8 kW
Dimensions 1,250 x 740 x 1,200 mm (49.2" x 29.4" x 47.2")
Specifications
(W x D x H):
Weight: Less than 225 kg (496 lb)
Optional Equipment: • 2nd Roll Tray (B340)
• Original Tray (B341)
• HDD (B342)
• Stamp Board (B321)
• Roll Holder Unit (B394)
• Printer Controller (TBA)
• I/F Board (TBA)
SM 7-3 B010
SPECIFICATIONS
2. 2ND ROLL TRAY (OPTION)

Copy Paper Size: Maximum: 914 x 6,000 mm (36" x 236")
(W x L)
Minimum: 210 x 250 mm (81/2" x 10")
Copy Paper Weight 52.3 ~ 104.7g/m² (13.9 ~ 27 lb.)
Copy Number Input: Ten-key pad, 1 to 99 (standard sizes only)
Copy Paper Capacity: Roll Feed:
Max. Diameter: 75 mm (6.9")
Max. Length: 150 m (137.6")
Roll Core Diameter: 76.4 ± 0.25 mm (about 3")
Power Source: From main frame
Weight: 32 kg (70.5 lb.)
B010 7-4 SM
SPECIFICATIONS
3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
7 1
2
6
B101V500.WMF
Specifications
No. Item Machine Code

1 Main Frame B010
2 2nd Roll Tray B340
3 HDD B342
4 Stamp Board B321
5 Original Tray B341
6 Roll Holder B394
7 Printer Controller G067
8 I/F Board G068
SM 7-5 B010
SPECIFICATIONS Rev. 3/2002
⇒4. MACHINE COMPONENTS
Component Function
Boards
CBG (Charge, Bias, Grid) Power High voltage power supply for the charge corona wire
Pack (C), development bias (B), and charge corona grid (G).
CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Transfers the image signals from the CIS LEDs.
Control Board
IOB (Input Output Board) Controls the input/output loads of each sensor, motor,
solenoid, and high voltage supply board, and contains
the drivers. The IOB also controls image processing,
transfers serial data between the machine and
peripherals, and controls the fusing unit.
IPU (Image Processing Unit) Processes image data from the CIS (Contact Image
Sensor), and sends it to the VDB (Video Drive Board)
and LPH (LED Print Heads). The IPU also controls the
HDD unit and the PC interfaces.
LPH (LED Print Head) Writes the image on the OPC drum (consists of three
LED arrays and the drive board)
MCU (Main Control Unit) The main board: controls the entire machine and
system processing. Two CPUs are mounted on the
MCU:
SCU. (System Control Unit). Controls the system,
scanner, operation panel, and the BICU.
BICU. (Base Image Control Unit). Controls image
processing in the IPU (Image Processing Unit) and
operation of the printer engine.
Operation Panel Keys Contains all the operation keys, and a touch-panel LCD
which displays the user interface.
Operation Panel LCD Board Controls the operation panel and LCD display panel.
Operation Panel LED Board Controls the initial settings for all user settings, the LCD
contrast control dial, machine status display, etc.
Original Feed Board Drives the original feed motor.
Power Supply Unit (PSU) Supplies DC power for the machine, and controls the
anti-condensation heaters.
RFDB (Roll Feed Board) 1 Drives the components in the upper roll tray unit,
including all motors, clutches, sensors, and switches.
RFDB (Roll Feed Board) 2 Drives the components in the optional lower roll tray
unit, including all motors, clutches, sensors, and
switches.
FPDB (Fusing Pressure Drive Drive the fusing pressure motors (one board each for
Boards) the left and right fusing pressure motor)
T&S (Transfer & Separation) Provides high voltage power supply for the transfer
Power Pack corona wire (T) and the separation corona wire (S).
VDB (Video Drive Board) Controls the image signals to be sent to the LPH (LED
Print Head).
B010 7-6 SM
Motors
Cutter Motor 1 Drives the cutter for the upper roll tray unit (for roll 1
and roll 2).
Cutter Motor 2 Drives the cutter for the optional lower roll tray unit (for
roll 3).
Development Motor Drives the development unit.
Drum Drive Motor Drives the OPC drum.
Fusing Drive Motor Drives the transport belt belts, fusing rollers, and exit
rollers.
Left Fusing Pressure Motor Controls the pressure applied to the left side of the
pressure roller in the fusing unit.
Original Feed Motor Drives the original feed roller.
Registration Motor Drives the registration roller and the toner collection coil
in the cleaning unit.
Right Fusing Pressure Motor Controls the pressure applied to the right side of the
pressure roller in the fusing unit.
Roll Feed Motor 1 Drives the feed rollers for roll 1 and roll 2 in the upper
roll tray unit.
Roll Feed Motor 2 Drives the feed roller for roll 3 in the optional lower roll
tray unit.
Transport Fan Motor (1) Drives the fans below the transport belt that hold the
paper on the transport belt
(2) Cools the fusing unit
(3) Removes ozone from the machine
Wire Cleaner Motor Drives the corona wire cleaning mechanism.
Sensors
By-Pass Feed Sensor Detects when a sheet of copy paper has been placed in
the by-pass feed tray.
Cutting Sensor 1 Detects entry of the leading edge of the copy from Roll
1, Roll 2 in the upper paper tray at the paper exit and
then detects the specified length of the copy for cutting.
Cutting Sensor 2 Detects entry of the leading edge of the copy from Roll
3 in the optional lower paper tray at the paper exit and
then detects the specified length of the copy for cutting.
Exit Sensor Detects jams in paper exit. Also detects the trailing
edge of the roll end to prevent damaging the fusing
motor.
Specifications
ID (Image Density) Sensor The machine uses this sensor to control toner supply.
There is no toner density sensor.
Left Fusing Pressure Motor HP Detects when the left fusing pressure motor for fusing
Sensor pressure adjustment is at home position.
Original Feed Unit Open Sensor Detects when the scanner has been opened.
Original Exit Sensor Detects jams in the original feed path, and detects the
trailing edge of the original at the rear original exit (for
straight-through feed).
Original Registration Sensor Detects jams in the original feed path, and detects the
leading edge of the original, which makes the CIS
(Contact Image Sensor) start to scan the original.
SM 7-7 B010
Original Set Sensor Detects the leading edge of the original, which starts
the original feed motor.
Original Size Sensors Detect the width of the original (four sensors).
Original Upper Exit Sensor Detects jams in the original feed unit at the upper exit.
Roll End Sensor 1 Detects the core of the roll (which is black), after roll 1
(upper roll tray unit) runs out.
Roll End Sensor 2 The same as roll end sensor 1, but monitors roll 2.
Roll End Sensor 3 The same as roll end sensor 1, but monitors roll 3
(optional lower roll tray unit).
Paper End Sensor 1 If this sensor detects a trailing edge, it means that roll 1
(upper roll tray unit) has run out. This is a backup for
roll end sensor 1 (if the core of the roll is not black, roll
end sensor 1 will not detect roll end).
Paper End Sensor 2 The same as paper end sensor 1, but monitors roll 2.
Paper End Sensor 3 The same as paper end sensor 1, but monitors roll 3.
Registration Sensor Detects paper at the registration rollers, to allow skew
to be corrected.
Right Fusing Pressure Motor HP Detects when the right fusing pressure motor for fusing
Sensor pressure adjustment is at home position.
Roll Lead Edge Sensor 1 Detects when the leading edge of roll 1 (upper roll tray
unit) has been fed back to its home position after
cutting.
Roll Lead Edge Sensor 2 As for roll lead edge sensor 1, but operates for roll 2.
Roll Lead Edge Sensor 3 As for roll lead edge sensor 1, but operates for roll 3.
Toner Overflow Sensor Detects toner overflow in the used toner tank.
Upper Unit Open Sensor Detects whether the upper unit is open or closed at the
left side.
Switches
Anti-condensation Heater Switch 1 Turns the heater in the upper paper tray unit on/off.
Anti-condensation Heater Switch 2 Turns the heater in the optional lower paper tray unit
on/off.
Auto Feed Switches 1 and 2 On the upper paper feed tray, press to feed the paper
then release to cut the paper (the cutter returns to its
home position on either side).
Auto Feed Switch 3 On the optional lower paper feed tray, press to feed the
paper then release to cut the paper (the cutter returns
to its home position on either side).
Cutter Safety Switch 1 Detects whether the upper roll tray guide plate is open
or closed. (When closed, the cutter is switched off and
does not operate.)
Cutter Safety Switch 2 Detects whether the optional roll paper tray guide plate
is open or closed. (When closed, the cutter is switched
off and does not operate.)
Exit Cover Switch Detects whether the exit cover is closed.
Left Cutter HP Switch 1 Detects whether the cutter in the upper roll tray has
returned to the left home position.
Left Cutter HP Switch 2 Detects whether the cutter in the optional lower roll tray
has returned to the left home position.
Main Power Switch Switches all machine components systems on/off.
B010 7-8 SM
Operation Switch Powers the machine on/off (system, base controller

remain operational).
Original Feed Unit Safety Switch Detects whether the original feed unit is closed.
Right Cutter HP Switch 1 Detects whether the cutter in the upper roll tray has
returned to the right home position.
Right Cutter HP Switch 2 Detects whether the cutter in the optional lower roll tray
has returned to the right home position.
Scanner Stop Switch Halts the feed of the original into the machine.
Toner Hopper Cover Open Switch Detects whether the toner hopper is open or closed.
Upper Unit Safety Switch Detects whether the upper unit is open or closed.
Upper Roll Tray Safety Switch Cuts power to the anti-condensation heaters when the
upper tray is opened.
Lower Roll Tray Safety Switch Cuts power to the anti-condensation heaters when the
lower tray is opened.
Clutches
Original Feed Clutch Controls the original feed roller.
Registration Clutch Controls the registration roller and the by-pass feed roller.
Toner Supply Clutch Controls the toner supply mechanism.
Roll Feed Clutch 1 Controls the feed roller for roll 1 in the upper roll tray unit.
Roll Feed Clutch 2 Controls the feed roller for roll 2 in the upper roll tray unit.
Roll Feed Clutch 3 Controls the feed roller for roll 3 in the optional lower roll tray
unit.
Solenoids
Original Junction Gate Determine where the original exits. When off, the original exits
Solenoid at the top; when on, the original exits at the rear. The user
selects the original exit at the operation panel.
Paper Junction Gate Determine where the copy exits. When on, the copy exits at
Solenoid the top; when off, the copy exits at the rear. The user selects
the copy exit at the operation panel.
Pick-off Pawl Solenoid Switches on to bring the pick-off pawls into contact with the
OPC drum, to ensure that paper does not wrap around the
drum after image transfer.
Specifications
Others
Anti-condensation Heaters There are eight in total:
Two heaters are provided for each paper roll (four in the
upper roll tray unit and two in the optional lower roll tray unit)
to prevent condensation around the feed rollers.
Two heaters prevent condensation around the drum.
Contact Image Sensor (CIS) The CIS unit is a strip of photodiodes to illuminate the original,
and a strip of phototransistors covered by a row of self-
focusing lenses. The CIS contacts the original directly, so the
size of the scanner unit can be reduced.
Fusing Lamps There are two fusing lamps inside the hot roller.
SM 7-9 B010
Fusing Thermofuse Provides backup overheat protection for the fusing lamps. If
thermistor overheat protection fails, the thermofuse opens and
cuts power to the fusing lamps.
Hot Roller Thermistor Located very close to the hot roller, the CPU uses this
thermistor to monitor the hot roller and control the operating
temperature of the fusing unit.
Pressure Roller Thermistor Located very close to the pressure roller, the CPU uses this to
monitor the pressure roller temperature.
PSU Cooling Fan Cools the PSU (Power Supply Unit) board.
Quenching Lamp Illuminates the OPC drum to remove residual electric charge
immediately after cleaning, which prepares the drum for
charging in the next copy cycle.
Total Feed Meter Counts all feeds from the first copy cycle. The metered total
always remains unaffected by resets, memory clear, etc.
B010 7-10 SM
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: B010-001 04/18/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – AF470W
SAVIN – NA
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

Note: This copy is intended as a master original
GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
!
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
MANUAL
SERVICE
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒.
PAGES:
• 1-26 Updated Information (wire saddle)
• 3-11 Updated Information (Toner hopper cover)
• 5-21 Updated Information (SP modes)
• 6-53 Updated Information (Hot Roller)
• 6-30 Updated Information (Development)
Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO 012WID

I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rev. 4/2002
!CAUTION

(1 screw).
[C]
[B]
G068I101.WMF
[A]
NOTE: Make sure the
connector is inserted
completely.
board.
B010 1-26 SM

SP Table Key
italics Comments.
SP1-XXX Feed
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
⇒
005 By-pass feed
[0 ~ 3/ 1 / 1 min. step]
0: No idling
1: 1 minutes
2: 3 minutes
Service
Tables
3: 5 minutes
[0~3, 0, 1/step]
Feedback) DFU
[130 ~ 150 / 143 / 1°C/step]
[130 ~ 210 / 185 / 1°C/step]
[90 ~ 125 / 90 / 1°C/step]
Calibration DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 3 / 1°C/step]
DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 0 / 1°C/step]
SM 5-21 B010
Rev.04/2002 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP5-XXX Mode
Japan Only
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
0: None
3: Pre-Paid Card
5: MF Keypad
For CSS use only:
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Yes
1: Stand-by
2: No
⇒
board.
Deleted 5501 through 5821
Service
Tables
SM 5-41 B010
Rev.04/2002

5803 Input Check Allows you to test component input (! 5.7)
5804 Output Check Allows you to test component output (! 5.8)
No.
is installed.
002 User Stamp
003 Page Numbering
004 Date Stamp
⇒
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
mode settings.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
[0~2 / 1 / 1 step]
0: Feet
1: Yards
2: Meters

004 Logging Data
SP5980.
B010 5-42 SM

Copying
[A]
B010D904.WMF
to Low Duty Mode.

2201 002
2201 003
2201 004
Mode Mode
B010 6-30 SM

[B]
cleaning roller.
B010D504.WMF

[B]
for 192°C [A] and 216°C [B])
[A]
[C]
Descriptions
Detailed

[B]
[A]
B010D506.WMF
SM 6-53 B010
BULLETIN NUMBER: B010-001Reissue ! 04/30/2002
04/30/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – AF470W
SAVIN – NA

GENERAL:
"
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
!• 1-25 Updated Information (Wire saddle)
• 3-11 Updated Information (Toner hopper cover)
• 6-53 Updated Information (Hot Roller)
• 6-30 Updated Information (Developer)

I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rev. 4/2002
!CAUTION

(1 screw).
[C]
[B]
G068I101.WMF
[A]
NOTE: Make sure the
connector is inserted
completely.
board.
B010 1-25 SM
3.4.4 QUENCHING LAMPS

Charge corona unit (☛ 3.4.3) [A]
[A]: Lamp bracket, left (!x 2, x 1)
[B]: Lamp bracket, right (!x 2, "x 1)
[C]: Quenching lamp arrays (" x 2)
[C]
[B] B010R106.WMF
3.5 DRUM AND
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
3.5.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT [A]
and
[A]: Left upper unit cover (!x 2)
[B]: Right upper unit cover (!x 2)
⇒ [C]: Toner hopper cover (!x 2)
[D]: Lower toner cartridge cover.
(Slides out, no screws need to
be removed.) [B]
[D]
[C] B010R301X.WMF
CAUTION: The development unit weighs

10.4 kg (22.9 lb.) with the toner cartridge
installed, or 8 kg (17.6 lb.) without the
toner cartridge.
Raise the upper unit.
[A]: Development bias connector ("x 1)
Make sure the upper unit is open. Do not
attempt to remove the development unit
with the unit closed.
[B]: Development unit (!x 6, "x 1)
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the fragile
wings on either end of the development
unit, never attempt to remove or install the [A]
[B]
development unit in the machine with the
upper unit closed.
B010R302.WMF
SM 3-11 B010

SP Table Key
italics Comments.
SP1-XXX Feed
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 2nd Roll [+10.0 ~ -10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
⇒
005 By-pass feed
[0 ~ 3/ 1 / 1 min. step]
0: No idling
1: 1 minutes
2: 3 minutes
Service
Tables
3: 5 minutes
[0~3, 0, 1/step]
Feedback) DFU
[130 ~ 150 / 143 / 1°C/step]
[130 ~ 210 / 185 / 1°C/step]
[90 ~ 125 / 90 / 1°C/step]
Calibration DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 3 / 1°C/step]
DFU
[-10 ~ +10 / 0 / 1°C/step]
SM 5-21 B010
Rev.04/2002 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES
SP5-XXX Mode
Japan Only
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
0: None
3: Pre-Paid Card
5: MF Keypad
For CSS use only:
[0 ~ 2 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Yes
1: Stand-by
2: No
⇒
board.
Deleted 5501 through 5821
Service
Tables
SM 5-41 B010
Rev.04/2002

5803 Input Check Allows you to test component input (! 5.7)
5804 Output Check Allows you to test component output (! 5.8)
No.
is installed.
002 User Stamp
003 Page Numbering
004 Date Stamp
⇒
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
mode settings.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
[0~2 / 1 / 1 step]
0: Feet
1: Yards
2: Meters

004 Logging Data
SP5980.
B010 5-42 SM

Copying
[A]
B010D904.WMF
to Low Duty Mode.

2201 002
2201 003
2201 004
Mode Mode
B010 6-30 SM

[B]
cleaning roller.
B010D504.WMF

[B]
for 192°C [A] and 216°C [B])
[A]
[C]
Descriptions
Detailed

[B]
[A]
B010D506.WMF
SM 6-53 B010
BULLETIN NUMBER: B010 - 002 04/18/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – AF470W
SAVIN – NA
INFORMATION
" GENERAL
SUBJECT: HDD SPINDLE CONTROL
GENERAL:
The following explains the timing and default settings of SC980 and their affect on the HDD Spindle control.
SYMPTOM:
"
SOFTWARE
When HDD Spindle Control is disabled (default), SC980 may occur just after the machine recovers from
Auto Off / Panel Off.
CAUSE:
When the machine is brought out of these modes, it is able to warm up quicker than when the main power is
turned on, and therefore checks the HDD status at an earlier point. However since the HDD must warm up
from a stop, it does not reach ready speed in time and a mainframe/HDD communication error occurs.
SOLUTION:
The default setting for HDD Spindle Control (SP4960-005, 006) has been changed from Off ! On, which
keeps the HDD rotating constantly.
ACTION IN THE FIELD:

When installing the HDD option, please change the setting of SP4960-005 and 006 from Off ! On:
Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Control No 112WID

BULLETIN NUMBER: B010 – 003 06/04/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – AF470W
SAVIN – NA
SUBJECT: SERIAL NUMBER SHEET FOR PRINTER/SCANNER CONTROLLER

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
With the release of the Printer/Scanner Controller, this Bulletin has been issued to explain the serial number
sheet and service parts Controller Board Assembly.
Serial number sheet for the Printer/Scanner Controller Board:

The following serial number sheet is packaged together with the Printer/Scanner Controller and the
service parts Controller Board Assembly.
When installing the board, be sure to affix the seal on the outside of the server PC.
Note:
1) The serial number on this sheet is necessary to obtain the RSP files.
2) If the board needs to be replaced again, it will be necessary to replace the serial number sheet also.
Serial number
P821910xxxx-C

APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
RICOH – AF470W
SAVIN – NA

GENERAL:
!
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• Iv TOC Updated Information.

• 5-50 BICU and SCU Updated Information (firmware modification histories).
Note: When installing either the BICU or SCU firmware in the field, be sure to update both together.

Rev. 05/2002
5.5.2 SYSTEM SETTING AND COPY SETTING (UP MODE) RESET ...5-14
5.6 PRINTING TEST PATTERNS .................................................................5-15
5.6.1 IMAGE PROCESSING TEST PATTERNS .....................................5-15
5.6.2 IMAGE DATA PATH TEST PATTERNS.........................................5-16
5.7 INPUT CHECK ........................................................................................5-17
5.8 OUTPUT CHECK ....................................................................................5-20
5.9 SP (SERVICE PROGRAM) MODE TABLES...........................................5-21
5.10 BICU and SCU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY………………..5-50
6 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................... 6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MACHINE LAYOUT..........................................................................6-1
6.1.2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...........................................6-2
6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-4
6.1.4 ORIGINAL/COPY PAPER PATHS ...................................................6-5
6.2 SCANNER .................................................................................................6-6
6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-6
6.2.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION..........................................................6-7
6.2.3 ORIGINAL FEED MECHANISM .......................................................6-7
6.2.4 ORIGINAL FEED SPEED.................................................................6-7
6.2.5 ORIGINAL TEMPORARY DELAY ....................................................6-8
6.2.6 SCANNING MECHANISM................................................................6-8
6.2.7 AUTO IMAGE DENSITY CORRECTION..........................................6-9
6.2.8 ORIGINAL EXIT SWITCHING MECHANISM ...................................6-9
6.3 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-10
6.3.1 GENERAL IMAGE PROCESSING FLOW CHART ........................6-10
6.3.2 ORIGINAL MODES ........................................................................6-11
Overview.............................................................................................6-11
Text Mode...........................................................................................6-12
Photo Mode ........................................................................................6-13
Text/Photo Mode ................................................................................6-14
Pale Mode...........................................................................................6-15
Generation ..........................................................................................6-16
Patched Original Mode .......................................................................6-17
Blue Line Mode...................................................................................6-18
Photo (Hard Tone) Mode ....................................................................6-19
6.3.3 INDEPENDENT DOT ERASURE ...................................................6-20
6.3.4 FOUR-VALUE ERROR DIFFUSION ..............................................6-21
6.3.5 MTF SETTINGS .............................................................................6-21
6.4 AROUND THE DRUM .............................................................................6-22
6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-22
6.4.2 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................6-23
6.4.3 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ..............................................................6-23
6.4.4 CORONA WIRE CLEANING ..........................................................6-23
6.4.5 CLEANING THE DRUM .................................................................6-24
6.4.6 COLLECTING USED TONER ........................................................6-25
6.4.7 QUENCHING..................................................................................6-26
B010 iv SM
5.10 FIRMWARE HISTORY

5.10.1 B010-FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY
SERIAL FIRMWARE
BICU SCU
First Production B0105162 A B0105172 A Initial 6.00
Production
⇒ 1. SP4960 005,006 (HDD Spindle
Control) setting changed
B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
Symptom:
When HDD Spindle Control is
disabled (default), SC980 may
occur just after the machine
recovers from Auto Off / Panel Off.
Cause:
When the machine is brought out of
these modes, it is able to warm up
quicker than when the main power
is turned on, and therefore checks
the HDD status at an earlier point.
However since the HDD must
warm up from a stop, it does not
reach ready speed in time and a
mainframe/HDD communication
error occurs.
Solution:
The default setting for HDD Spindle
Control (SP4960-005, 006) has
been changed from
Off ! On, which keeps the HDD
rotating constantly.
Note: When installing the HDD option
in the following machines, please
change the setting of SP4960-005
and 006 from Off ! On:
B010-27: J201060001 – J201060040
(40 units).
2. New UP mode added (Weekly
Output Volume)
To prevent toner scattering from the
development unit (see conditions
below), the “Weekly Output Volume”
setting has been added to System
Setting – General Features.
Continue…
B010 5-50 SM
Rev. 05/2002 FIRMWARE HISTORY
SERIAL FIRMWARE
BICU SCU
Symptom: B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
When customers use low duty mode
to make high-volume copy jobs
(relative to the ACV), the toner
concentration in the development unit
increases. This causes the
oversupplied toner to drop onto the
copies, especially under low
temperature conditions.
Solution:
Change the “Weekly Output Volume”
according to the customer’s average
weekly copy volume from inside
System Setting – General features:
Less than 750m (2,500 ft): Low duty
mode (default).
More than 750m (2,500 ft): High duty
mode
Action in the field:
Please instruct customers on the
following points at machine
installation:
Service
Tables
1) Method for how to enter UP Mode
and change the Weekly Output
Volume value.
2) For the first 1-2 months following
installation, have the customer keep
track of their copy volume at weekly
intervals. The weekly changes in CV
over this time will enable them to
decide which of the 2 settings is best
for them.
Note: For customers installing the

B010 as a replacement machine,
please use the weekly ACV on the
previous machine for reference and
set the Weekly Output Volume
accordingly (as a starting point).
Continue…
SM 5-51 B010
SERIAL FIRMWARE
BICU SCU
B0105162 B B0105172 B Sep.2001 6.06
Production
3) During these first couple of months,
if the average weekly copy volume
exceeds 750m (2,500 ft), please have
the customer change the setting of
the Weekly Output Volume to “More
than 750m (2,500 ft)”.
Note: Please also check the total

counter value at PM visits, calculate
the weekly CV, and if necessary
change the Weekly Output Volume
setting.
3. 24-inch originals are recognized as

30-inch originals
When 30-inch paper is selected on
the operation panel, 24-inch originals
are automatically detected as 30-inch
originals.
4. “NRG A070” added to SP5907

(Plug & Display)
The model name NRG A070 has
been added as follows:
1: RICOH imagio Wide 7040 (Japan)
2: RICOH Aficio 470W
3: NRG A070
B010 5-52 SM
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH – AFICIO 470W
SAVIN - NA
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

!
GENERAL:
PARTS
The following parts updates are being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs.
• UPDATE 1: Upper Guide Rod – To prevent the original from folding over onto the
operation panel, the length of the Upper Guide Rod – Original Tray has
been increased from 239 mm to 289 mm. The following part update is
being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts
Catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
B0106332 B0106333 Upper Guide Rod – Original Tray 3 1 9 32
Continued…
Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. CONTROL NO. 015WID
Tech Service Bulletin No. B010 – 005
Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Upper Guide
Rod – Original Tray installed during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER

Gestetner N/A
Ricoh Aficio 470W J2010800001
Savin N/A
• UPDATE 2: Washer & Spacer –The following parts corrections are being issued
for all B010 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalog with the
following information.
104
104
REFERENCE
07080050B Washer – M5 - -
69 104
B0102917 Spacer – 5x12x2.3 - -
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – NA
SAVIN – NA
SUBJECT: SC951 (DURING PRINTING ONLY)

ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
An SC951 (F-Gate Signal Error) is generated while performing a print job.
CAUSE:
The machine switches over to Low CPM mode during a print job, causing the interval between sheets to
increase. The controller does not get a fast enough response from the mainframe, causing an error at the
controller side.
NOTE: The machine tends to switch over to Low CPM mode when it cannot maintain a high enough
fusing temperature, such as when prints are made right after the machine reaches Copy Ready
or recovers from Energy Saver Mode. Furthermore, the machine has a greater tendency to
switch over to Low CPM mode when large volumes of prints are made continuously under such
conditions.
COUNTERMEASURE:
In order to minimize occurrences of SC951, please change the following settings. These settings will ensure
that the fusing temperature remains in the optimum range:
1. System Settings – General Features – “Fusing Adjustment: Paper Tray”: Set to "3".
2. System Settings – General Features – “Panel Off Timer”: Set to "0 sec".
3. System Settings – General Features – “Energy Saver Timer”: Set to "0 sec".
4. System Settings – Key Operator Tools – “Auto off Timer”: Set to "240 min".
5. SP1917 “Ready Temp. Setting”: Set to "1" (195°C All paper types/thickness).
6. SP1103 “Fusing Idling”: Set to "3" (5min).
Copyright  2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: FIRMWARE MODIFICATION – BICU and SCU

GENERAL:

FIRMWARE
The latest firmware version can be downloaded at the Technology Solution Center FTP Site
http://tsc.ricohcorp.com. Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 and Publication Bulletin #023 for more information about the
FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM/Flash Card Exchange program.
B010 BICU and SCU FIRMWARE MODIFICATION

FIRMWARE
SERIAL FIRMWARE
DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION LEVEL
NUMBER VERSION
BICU SCU
Adds the following: B0105162C B0105172C Nov. ‘01 6.08
1. New SP Mode added to enable Ready Production
Temperature Setting function (SP1917):
This has been added in order to prevent NOTE: Version
insufficient fusing with translucent paper 6.08 requires
the
when making copies just after the machine Printer/Scanner
is turned on. The settings for this mode Controller.
are as follows:
1 Mode Number/name Function/ [Setting]

1917 Ready Temp. Setting Select the ready fusing temperature.
[0 ~ 2/ 0 / 1 step]
2. Default change for Function Reset Timer

(System Settings – General Features 2/3):
The default of this mode was changed
from "3 sec" to "instant" for use with the
Printer/Scanner controller.
3. Design-use SP Modes added

SP5959 and SP5957 have been newly
added, however these are strictly for
Design use only.
Please do not change the values in the …continued
field. The defaults are as follows:

Page 2 of 5

FIRMWARE
SERIAL FIRMWARE
NUMBER VERSION
BICU SCU
SP5959 OFF
SP5957 Disabled
Corrects the following:
4. SMC printout onto undefined paper sizes

In response to a request from the field, the
SMC printouts can now be printed onto
any paper size that can be loaded into the
paper trays.
5. Occurrence conditions changed for SC353

SC353 will not be displayed during Toner
End.
This was changed because sometimes
when copying originals with a very high
image area ratio, SC353 would occur
unnecessarily when the ID sensor pattern
density dropped and the Near End
condition was detected.
6. Jam Recovery
The machine was sometimes unable to
perform successful jam recovery if a jam
occurred while printing out a series of
preset jobs.
7. Display error - number of jobs

Even after being cancelled, a preset job is
not subtracted from the total job count.
8. Part of image missing when printing out

"Additional Copies" with electronic sort,
mixed original mode
Following a mixed-original electronic
sorting job, the machine is still set to use
the paper roll it did for the last copy.
Therefore when "Additional Copies" are
initiated, instead of resetting the paper roll
to the initial one, the machine starts
printing out onto the most recently used
roll, cutting off some of the image.
Software corrected so that copies of any
additional sets are printed out onto their
correct sizes, i.e. as originally set in the
initial job.
…continued
9. Unlimited scanning before beginning a

Page 3 of 5

FIRMWARE
SERIAL FIRMWARE
NUMBER VERSION
BICU SCU
copy job
Software changed so that when the Print
Start Trigger is set to "press start key",
originals can be scanned an unlimited
number of times before initiating the copy
job. Each time a new scan is initiated, the
previous scan data is overwritten.
Adds the following: B0105162D B0105172D June ‘02 6.11
Production
1. Missing image data with wide originals
(230V version only)
Symptom
Image data is missing on the right and left
edges (30mm from the edge) when
feeding originals over 841mm in width.
Cause
Even if Original Size Auto Detect (System
Settings, General Features 2/2) is turned
OFF, the printer/scanner controller is
informed of the maximum scanning width
of 841mm.
Solution
When Original Size Auto Detect is
deactivated and the original size sensor
for 841mm detects the original, the
machine will regard this as a width of
914mm and send this data to the
printer/scanner controller.
NOTE: Please advise users to deactivate
Original Size Auto Detect when
scanning/copying originals over 841mm in
width.
2. Scanner reserve error

Symptom
The Reserve Scanner Error is displayed in
the Scantool function of Plotbase.
Cause
The Function Reset Timer is not set to
“instant.”
Solution
The Function Reset Timer has been
deleted from System Settings – General
Features 2/3, and is now controlled from
SP5900. …continued
Page 4 of 5

FIRMWARE
SERIAL FIRMWARE
NUMBER VERSION
BICU SCU

5900 Function Reset Timer Adjusts the Function Reset Timer.
[0, 3~30 / 0 / 1 sec step]

NOTE: The update to version 6.11 in the field will not automatically change the Function Reset Timer
setting, therefore it is necessary to manually set this to “instant” after the update is completed.
3. New SP Mode added to enable

Continuous Original Feed (SP5957)
5957 Continuous Original Feed Enables or disables the continuous feeding of originals through
the original feeder. When enabled, originals can be fed one by
one during a copy job without having to wait for each copy to
exit.
Corrects the following:
4. PM Light is displayed before 10,000m

(every 10,000 ft.)
The PM light will now be displayed on the
operation panel every 10,000 meters,
regardless of the unit set for the total
counter in SP5980.
5. Function error - User code

Even though the machine prompts the
operator to enter the User Code, it is
possible to make copies without inputting
any code.
NOTE: User Codes cannot be used with

the printer/scanner controller, even though
the operation panel displays the user code
screen.
6. Display changed for SP4428-002: Image

Scan Adjustment - Start
”Executing” remains displayed even after
the SP has completed the adjustment.
This has been changed so that no
message is displayed during the
adjustment, and “Succeeded” is displayed
when it is completed.
Page 5 of 5

FIRMWARE
SERIAL FIRMWARE
NUMBER VERSION
BICU SCU
Corrects the following: B0105162E B0105172E Oct. ‘02 6.12
Production
1. “SAVIN 4700WD”, “Gestetner A070”, “
LANIER LW410” added to SP5907 (Plug &
Display)
The model names have been added as
follows:
1: RICOH IMAJIO Wide 7040 (Japan)
2: RICOH AFICIO 470W
3: NRG A070
4: SAVIN 4700WD
5: Gestetner A070
6: LANIER LW410
Corrects the following: B0105162F B0105172F Nov. ‘02 6.13
Production
1. An output check for the toner supply clutch
has been added to SP5804 (Output Check) .
Item Parts
NOTE: Version 6.08 requires the Printer/Scanner Controller.

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL – INSERT

GENERAL:
!
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.
• Legend Page Updated Information (Legend)

• 5-7 Updated Information (UP (User Program) Mode)
• 5-20 Updated Information (Output Check)
• 5-22 through 26 Updated Information (SP Mode Tables)
• 5-34 Updated Information (SP Mode Tables)
• 5-42 Updated Information (SP Mode Tables)

Rev. 02/2003
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE
GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B010 A070 LW410 AF470W 4700WD
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 9/2001 Original Printing
1 3/2002 Revised Pages
Rev. 02/2003 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE
5.2 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE

5.2.1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings, then press a tab. Press the Next and Prev buttons to browse all
General Features
Fuser Adjustment: Paper Tray
By-pass Tray Paper Type Plain
Original Size Detect A Series
Tray Paper Size A Series
Paper Volume Setting ---
Tray Paper Type ---
Original Output Tray Upper
Copy Output Tray Front
Paper Exit Hold On
Original Feed Delay 1 Wait 1 sec.

Original Scan Delay 2 Wait 1 sec.
Function Priority Copier
⇒ Function Reset Timer Instant
System Reset Timer 60 sec.
Fine Magnification: Copier 0.0%
Fine Magnification - Printer 0.0%
Auto Paper Roll Switching Off
Service
Tables
Panel Tone On
Ready Tone On
Copy Count Display Up
Panel Off Level Level 4
Panel Off Timer 60 sec.
Panel Off Timer 15 min.
Date/Time
Date MM/DD/YYYY
Time 00hr. 00mi. 00sec.
Key Operator Tools
User Code Access Off
Key Counter Access Off
Set Key code Off
Key Operator Access Off
Auto Off Timer 60 min.
AOF (Keep It On) *1 On
Optional Hard Disk Installed
*1
Enables auto off for Energy Star and should not be changed without the consent
of the customer.
SM 5-7 B010
OUTPUT CHECK Rev. 02/2003
5.8 OUTPUT CHECK

You can check the listed parts with SP5804.
Item Parts
5 Registration Motor
6 Registration Clutch
7 Paper Junction Gate Sol.
8 Transport Fan Motors
9 Cutter 2
14 Cutter 1
15 Drum Drive Motor
16 Fusing Drive Motor
17 Right Fusing Pressure HP Position
18 Right Fusing Pressure Jam Position
19 Left Fusing Pressure HP Position
20 Left Fusing Pressure Jam Position
22 Charge Corona Wire Cleaner Motor
23 Development Motor
25 Pick-off Pawl Solenoid
29 LPH (LED Print Head)
30 Quenching Lamp
31 ID Sensor LED
32 Charge Corona
33 Charge Grid – Image Area
34 Charge Grid – ID Sensor Pattern
35 Charge Corona and Grid – Image Area
36 Development Bias – Image Area
37 Development Bias – ID Sensor Pattern
38 Transfer Corona – Leading Edge Plain Paper
39 Transfer Corona – Plain Paper
40 Separation Corona – Leading Edge Plain Paper
41 Separation Corona – Plain Paper
42 Total Counter
43 Anti-condensation Heater
50 Drum Potential Measuring Mode
51 Original Junction Gate Solenoid
52 Original Feed Clutch
53 Original Feed Motor – Forward
55 CIS LED
⇒ 56 Toner Supply Clutch
B010 5-20 SM

[0.5~8.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 second/step]
002 2nd Roll [-15 ~ +15 / -7 / 1% /step]
003 3rd Roll
[-100 ~ +100 / +24 / 2/step]
Control [0.0 ~ +18 / 10 / 2%/step]
position.
[1 = ON, 0 = OFF]
the image.
[0.0~1.0 / 0.7 / 0.1/step]
[0.0~1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[0.0~1.0 / 0.4 / 0.1/step]
[0 ~ 2/ 0 / 1 step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-22 SM

Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
48", Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
SM 5-23 B010

Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
48", Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-24 SM

Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[0 ~1 / 1 / 1 step]
SM 5-25 B010

feeding.
[-50 ~ +50 / -14 / 1 mm/step]

B010 5-26 SM

[0.5~8.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 second/step]
002 2nd Roll [-15 ~ +15 / -7 / 1% /step]
003 3rd Roll
[-100 ~ +100 / +24 / 2/step]
Control [0.0 ~ +18 / 10 / 2%/step]
position.
[1 = ON, 0 = OFF]
the image.
[0.0~1.0 / 0.7 / 0.1/step]
[0.0~1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[0.0~1.0 / 0.4 / 0.1/step]
[0 ~ 2/ 0 / 1 step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-22 SM

Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
48", Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Paper [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
SM 5-23 B010

Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
48", Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
B010 5-24 SM

Film [-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-10.0 ~ +10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Plain Paper [-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
Service
Tables
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-20.0 ~ +20.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[-30.0 ~ +30.0 / 0.0 / 0.1/step]
[0 ~1 / 1 / 1 step]
SM 5-25 B010

feeding.
[-50 ~ +50 / -14 / 1 mm/step]

B010 5-26 SM
SP4-XXX Scanner
4008 Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Adjusts the magnification by changing the scanning speed.
[-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
4010 Scanner Sub Scan Registration
001 Leading Edge Fine adjusts the time between the sensor-on position and
the leading edge of the image.
[-10 ~ +10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trailing Edge Fine adjusts the time between the sensor-off position and
the trailing edge of the image. This determines the timing
for the CIS to stop reading the image after the original has
passed the registration sensor.
[-10 ~ +10 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4011 Scanner Main Scan Registration Adjusts the scan registration.
[-4 ~ +4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4012 Scanner Erase Margin
001 Leading Edge Adjusts the non-scanning area.
002 Trailing Edge [0.0 ~ +9.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 Left
004 Right
4013 Scanner Free Run
001 Start To start the free run, press the Start button.
To end the free run, press the Stop button.
The free run simulates scanning pages of length
determined by SP4013 003, with the interval between each
page determined by SP4013 002.
002 Page Interval Setting Adjusts the scanner free run (see the description for 4013
001).
[0 ~ 250 / 100 / 1 s step]
003 Original Length Setting Adjusts the scanner free run (the description for 4013 001).
[0.1 ~ 10 / 1.2 / 0.1 m step]
4101 Scanner Main Scan Magnification Adjusts the side-to-side scan magnification.
[-0.9 ~ +0.9 / 0.0 / 0.1 % step]
4303 Originals Smaller Than A4 Enables/disables the processing for small size originals.
Lengthwise. [0 ~ 1/ 0 / 1 step]
0: Copying disabled
1: Copy taken as A4 Lengthwise
⇒ 4428 Image Scan Adjustment
001 Flag Display Displays “Succeeded” after executing 4428-002.
002 Start Press the Start button to adjust the standard white level.
After adjustment, check the result with SP4428-001.
4903 Image Setting
006 Smoothing Filter Level - Selects the four-value diffusion filter level for the Photo
Photo (Hard Tone) mode.
[0 ~ 5 / 0 / 1 step]
This setting is effective only if the user has selected Photo
(Hard Tone) at the operation panel. The zero default setting
switches four-value error diffusion off. To weaken the effect,
select a low number (e.g. 1), or to strengthen the effect
select a higher number (e.g. 3).
B010 5-34 SM
Unnessary Service Programs deleted from this area.
5803 Input Check Allows you to test component input ( 5.7)
5804 Output Check Allows you to test component output ( 5.8)
No.
⇒ 5900 Function Reset Timer Adjusts the Function Reset Timer.
[0, 3~30 / 0 / 1 sec step]

is installed.
002 User Stamp
003 Page Numbering
004 Date Stamp
⇒ 5957 Continuous Original Feed Enables or disables the continuous feeding of originals
through the original feeder. When enabled, originals can be
fed one by one during a copy job without having to wait for
each copy to exit.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
⇒ 5959 Design use only
mode settings.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 step]
0: Enable
1: Disable
B010 5-42 SM
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: TONER HOPPER JOINT SHAFT


GENERAL:
PARTS
To ensure that the gear (AB017539) does not break when the toner cartridge is installed without being
shaken, the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft has been changed as shown below.
NOTE: Make sure developer does not get into the joint shaft unit assembly when the developer is
replaced. If developer gets into the joint part, disassemble the unit and clean it immediately.
If the developer were to remain in the assembly, it would cause joint operation problems due to
excessive mechanical load and parts wear.
Toner Supply Unit Plate
E - Ring
Seal – 22x52x0.5
Shaft Holder
Spring – 10N
Toner Supply
Clutch
Left Side Plate

Joint Shaft Unit –
Toner Hopper
Joint Shaft –
Toner Hopper
REFERENCE
B0103204 Joint Shaft – Toner Hopper 1-0 X/X 49 5
B0103206 Joint Shaft Unit – Toner Hopper 0-1 3/S 49 5
B0103211 Seal – 22x52x0.5 0-1 3/S 49 29*
B0103212 Spring – 10N 0-1 3/S 49 30*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
Continued…

Tech Service Bulletin No. B010 – Draft
Page 2 of 2
Installation Procedure for New Parts:

1. Remove the Joint Shaft – Toner Hopper (1 e-ring, 1 screw).
2. Clean the left side plate with alcohol and then attach the Seal.
3. Attach the spring to the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft Unit and then insert the unit into the Left Side Plate as
shown.
4. While pushing in the Joint Shaft Unit, reattach the Toner Supply Clutch, Toner Supply Unit Plate and
Shaft Holder, then secure them with the e-ring.
NOTE: After reinstalling the Toner Supply Clutch, make sure that the clutch pin has been inserted
correctly in the slot.
5. Secure the Toner Supply Unit Plate (1 screw).
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style parts installed
during production.

RICOH Aficio 470W J2021200001
Gestetner A070
SAVIN 4700WD
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD

SUBJECT: DIRTY BACKGROUND
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
Please use the following as a troubleshooting guide when dirty background is reported from the field.
.
SYMPTOM:
Dirty background (all types).
POSSIBLE CAUSES
1. SP2201-004 setting error:

This SP may be set for low-duty copy jobs even when copying at high volumes.
2. Incorrect ID sensor data:
INFORMATION
GENERAL
1) Dirty ID sensor.
2) Defective ID sensor.
3. Drum light fatigue:
Defective quenching lamp.
4. Developer deterioration:
1) Developer deteriorates faster when there is a Diazo machine installed nearby which emits
ammonia.
2) The developer is used past its PM interval.
5. Drum deterioration:
1) Drums deteriorate faster when there is a Diazo machine installed nearby which emits ammonia.
2) The thickness of the drum’s under layer (UL) is near specification minimum in some areas.
Specification: 3.0 +/- 0.5µm.
Backgrounding process:
With the B010 the grid voltage is set relatively high in order to bring out highlight areas more clearly.
The thinner areas at the lower limit of UL specification (2.5µm) are unable to tolerate the higher
electrical field applied to the drum surface, causing an electrical leak, which appears as dirty
background on the copy surface.
Copyright  2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2

ACTION
Perform the following, making sure to check the image quality for any improvements after replacing or
cleaning any components. If at any point it returns to an acceptable level, there is no need to continue the
procedure.
1) Make copy samples.

2) Print out the SMC sheet.
3) Check the ID sensor data with SP3-103 and make sure that Vsg and Vsp are within the following ranges:
Vsg: 4.0 +/- 0.1 Vsp: 0.5 +/- 0.1
If they are not, clean the ID sensor and then make 10 copies (A1/D, sideways). This will stabilize the
toner concentration in the developer. Check the data again, and if it is still not within target levels,
replace the sensor.
4) Check to see that the quenching lamp (red LED) remains ON during copying. If it does not, check for
loose harness connections. If the connections are normal, replace the lamp.
5) Return the following SP settings back to their factory defaults (if changed).
Note: Set SP2-201-004 to "High Duty Copy Jobs" to prevent toner scattering due to low copy volume.
SP No. Description Factory setting sheet No.

2001 Charge Corona Current
-001 Image Area 05020010100
-002 Grid for Image Area 05020010200
-003 Grid for ID Sensor Pattern 05020010300
-001 Image Area 05022010100
-002 ID Sensor Pattern - Low Duty Copy Jobs 05022010200
-003 ID Sensor Pattern - High Duty Copy Jobs 05022010300
-004 Copy Jobs 05022010400
6) Check the PM intervals for all PM parts and replace or clean any if necessary.
Note: It is particularly important that the corona wire, grid wire and ozone filter are
not used past their PM intervals.
7) Change SP2-001-002 from –875 to –800, and SP2-201-001 from –705 to –600.
Note: This has a side effect of lowering the image density in solid image areas.
Therefore after changing these values, make sure the ID level is acceptable to the customer.
8) Replace the developer.
9) If the above procedure does not eliminate the dirty background, drum fatigue is the most likely cause,
therefore please replace the drum and cleaning blade.
Cut-in Serial/Lot Numbers
(Drums with increased UL thickness):

Machines: From Aug ’02 Drums: From July ’02
B010-17: J2020800001 AM21826101 ~
Page 2 of 2
BULLETIN NUMBER: B010 – 010 REISSUE + 06/24/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD

SUBJECT: DIRTY BACKGROUND
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
Please use the following as a troubleshooting guide when dirty background is reported from the field.
SYMPTOM:
Dirty background (all types).
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
1. SP2201-004 setting error:

This SP may be set for low-duty copy jobs even when copying at high volumes.
2. Incorrect ID sensor data:
INFORMATION
GENERAL
1) Dirty ID sensor.
2) Defective ID sensor.
3. Drum light fatigue:
Defective quenching lamp.
4. Developer deterioration:
1) Developer deteriorates faster when there is a Diazo machine installed nearby which emits ammonia.
2) The developer is used past its PM interval.
5. Drum deterioration:
1) Drums deteriorate faster when there is a Diazo machine installed nearby which emits ammonia.
2) The thickness of the drum’s under layer (UL) is near specification minimum in some areas.
Specification: 3.0 +/- 0.5µm.
Backgrounding process:
With the B010 the grid voltage is set relatively high in order to bring out highlight areas more clearly. The
thinner areas at the lower limit of UL specification (2.5µm) are unable to tolerate the higher electrical field
applied to the drum surface, causing an electrical leak, which appears as dirty background on the copy
surface.

Tech Service Bulletin No. B010 – 010 REISSUE +
ACTION:
Perform the following, making sure to check the image quality for any improvements after replacing or
cleaning any components. If at any point it returns to an acceptable level, there is no need to continue the
procedure.
1) Make copy samples.

2) Print out the SMC sheet.
3) Check the ID sensor data with SP3-103 and make sure that Vsg and Vsp are within the following ranges:
Vsg: 4.0 +/- 0.1 Vsp: 0.5 +/- 0.1
If they are not, clean the ID sensor and then make 10 copies (A1/D, sideways). This will stabilize the
toner concentration in the developer. Check the data again, and if it is still not within target levels,
replace the sensor.
4) Check to see that the quenching lamp (red LED) remains ON during copying. If it does not, check for
loose harness connections. If the connections are normal, replace the lamp.
5) Return the following SP settings back to their factory defaults (if changed).
Note: Set SP2-201-004 to "High Duty Copy Jobs" to prevent toner scattering due to low copy volume.
+ SP No. Description Factory Defaults

2001 Charge Corona Current
-001 Image Area -1250
-002 Grid for Image Area -875
-003 Grid for ID Sensor Pattern -700
-001 Image Area -705
-002 ID Sensor Pattern - Low Duty Copy Jobs -405
-003 ID Sensor Pattern - High Duty Copy Jobs -475
-004 Copy Jobs Low Duty Copy Jobs
6) Check the PM intervals for all PM parts and replace or clean any if necessary.
Note: It is particularly important that the corona wire, grid wire and ozone filter are
not used past their PM intervals.
7) Change SP2-001-002 from –875 to –800, and SP2-201-001 from –705 to –600.
Note: This has a side effect of lowering the image density in solid image areas.
Therefore after changing these values, make sure the ID level is acceptable to the customer.
8) Replace the developer.
9) If the above procedure does not eliminate the dirty background, drum fatigue is the most likely cause,
therefore please replace the drum and cleaning blade.
Cut-in Serial/Lot Numbers
(Drums with increased UL thickness):

Machines: From Aug ’02 Drums: From July ’02
B010-17: J2020800001 AM21826101 ~
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
GENERAL:

PARTS
• UPDATE 1: DC Motor – To facilitate servicing, the DC Motor service part has been
changed to include the harness and gear. Please update your parts
catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
AX050092 DC Motor – DC24V 7.18W 1→0 33 22
B0102836 Motor Harness 1→0 1 33 23
B0102852 DC Motor: DC24V 7.18W 1 33 22
UNITS AFFECTED:
The serial number cut-in information was not available at time of this publication.

• UPDATE 2: Counter: SRAM – STK15C88-P45 – The following has been changed

due to the 0-counter specification change. The electronic counter is
now set to 0 when released from the factory instead of set to a negative
value. Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
B0109001 - SRAM - STK15C88- 45 (Counter)
1 1 65 24
- B0109590 Counter: SRAM - STK15C88- 45
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Counter: SRAM
installed during production.

Gestetner A070
Lanier LW410
J2030300001
Ricoh Aficio 470W
Savin 4700WD
Page 2 of 6
• UPDATE 3: LCD: HVGA – The LCD has been changed due to a vendor change.
Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
A2935215 LCD – HVGA U65
1 0 13 21
B0105290 LCD: HVGA: SH: BL
UNITS AFFECTED:
Page 3 of 6
• UPDATE 4: Development Unit – The Development Unit and Toner Hopper Casing
have been changed due to parts standardization with another model.
Please update your parts catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
B0103050 B0103053 Development Unit 1 0 49 *
B0103091 B0103092 Toner Hopper casing 1 0 49 20
UNITS AFFECTED:
Page 4 of 6
• UPDATE 5: Left and Right Paper Guides – Two additional Paper Guides (pawls)
have been added to the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit to ensure
that the copy paper does not come into contact with the corona wire if a
jam occurs in this area. This addition effectively decreases the space
between each pawl. Please update your parts catalog with the
REFERENCE
OLD PART NEW PART
DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
NO. NO.
A1743936 Left Paper Guide – T/S Center
1 3/S 43 17
A1743932 Guide: Paper: T/S Corona: Middle: Left
A1743935 Right Paper Guide – T/S Center
1 3/S 43 16
A1743931 Guide: Paper: T/S Corona: Middle: Right
NOTE: When replacing with the modified parts for the first time, they must be installed together as a set.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style Guide: Paper:
T/S Corona: Middle Left and Right installed during production.

Gestetner A070
Lanier LW410
J20308xxxxx
Ricoh Aficio 470W
Savin 4700WD
Page 5 of 6
• UPDATE 6: HDD– The HDD has been changed because the unit is no longer
manufactured by the vendor. Please update your parts catalog with the
REFERENCE
B0655112 - HDD: 40GB: ST340016A
2 0 69 11
- A2955177 HDD: 40GB: ST340014A
UNITS AFFECTED:
Page 6 of 6

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: HOLDER: PAPER HOLDER: MIDDLE
GENERAL:
The Holder: Paper Holder: Middle has been changed due to parts standardization with a newer model. The

following part update is being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts catalog with the
PARTS
REFERENCE
B0102794 Middle Holder – paper Holder
2 0 33 10
B6412794 Holder: Paper Holder: Middle


APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD

GENERAL:
PARTS
• UPDATE 1: Cutter Unit Pulley Gear– The Cutter Unit Pulley Gear was incorrectly
listed in the B010 Parts Catalog as Motor Gear –13 and the part
number was also incorrect. Please correct your B010 Parts Catalog
with the following information.
REFERENCE
INCORRECT CORRECT
DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
PART NO. PART NO.
A1744870 Motor Gear - 13 1 - 33 19
A1744850 Gear: Pulley: Cutter Unit 1 - 33 19

• UPDATE 2: Timing Pulley – 32T – The Timing Pulley – 32T has been registered
as a service part. Please update your B010 Parts Catalog with the
Item 29: AB030679

Timing Pulley – 32T
REFERENCE
NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AB030679 Timing Pulley – 32T 2 35 29 *
Page 2 of 2

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied.
!
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.
MANUAL
SERVICE
PAGES:
• iiii Updated Information (Table of Contents)

• 3-35 Updated Information (IOB,MCU)
• 3-47 New Information (Memory Clear Procedure)

Rev. 06/2004
3.9 BOARDS .................................................................................................3-35

3.9.1 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) .......................................................3-35
3.9.2 IOB (INPUT OUTPUT BOARD), MCU (MAIN CONTROL UNIT)....3-35
3.9.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................3-36
3.9.4 HDD REPLACEMENT ....................................................................3-36
3.10 ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................3-37
3.10.1 CIS AND WHITE PLATEN ROLLER ADJUSTMENT ...................3-37
3.10.2 LPH ADJUSTMENT......................................................................3-38
3.10.3 IMAGE POSITION, MAGNIFICATION, MARGIN ADJ..................3-41
3.11 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE..........................................................3-47
TROUBLESHOOTING
4 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 4-1
4.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-1
4.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................................4-2
4.3 JAM CODE TABLE..................................................................................4-18
4.4 COVER OPEN.........................................................................................4-19
4.5 IMAGE DATA PROCESSING FLOW CHART .........................................4-20
4.5.1 DATA FLOW IN 1-TO-1 COPY MODE ...........................................4-20
4.5.2 DATA FLOW IN REPEAT COPY MODE ........................................4-20
4.5.3 DATA FLOW IN SCANNING MODE...............................................4-21
4.5.4 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (A0 OR SMALLER).................4-21
4.5.5 DATA FLOW IN PRINTING MODE (LARGER THAN A0) ..............4-22
4.5.6 DATA FLOW IN TEST PATTERN PRINTING ................................4-22
4.6 IMAGE PROBLEM TROUBLESHOOTING..............................................4-23
4.6.1 FLOW CHART ................................................................................4-23
4.6.2 SCANNING.....................................................................................4-24
4.6.3 PRINTING ......................................................................................4-26
SERVICE TABLES
5 SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 5-1
5.1 SOFTWARE UPGRADING........................................................................5-1
5.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 UPGRADING THE SCU FIRMWARE...............................................5-2
5.1.3 UPGRADING THE BICU FIRMWARE..............................................5-4
5.1.4 UPGRADING THE SCU AND BICU TOGETHER ............................5-5
5.1.5 UPGRADING THE AMDP FIRMWARE ............................................5-6
5.2 UP (USER PROGRAM) MODE .................................................................5-7
5.2.1 INITIAL SYSTEM SETTINGS...........................................................5-7
5.2.2 INITIAL COPIER SETTINGS............................................................5-8
5.3 SERVICE PROGRAM (SP) MODES .......................................................5-10
5.3.1 ENTERING SP MODE....................................................................5-10
5.3.2 HOW TO USE THE SP MODE .......................................................5-11
5.4 TOUCH PANEL CALIBRATION ..............................................................5-13
5.5 SOFTWARE, SYSTEM AND COPY SETTING RESET ..........................5-14
5.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ......................................................................5-14
SM iii B010
Rev. 06/2004 BOARDS
3.9 BOARDS
3.9.1 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT)
Left covers ( 3.1.2)
[A]: PSU ( x 4, x all)
NOTE:
• Before removing the Neutral and Line
bayonet connectors [B], mark them “N”
and “L” before you remove them so you
can match them with the N (left) and L
(right) notations on the board when you
re-connect them.
Replacement
Adjustment
• If a copy tray support has been installed
and
below the board, you may need to
remove it in order to remove all the
screws from the PSU board. [A]
B010R907.WMF
3.9.2 IOB (INPUT OUTPUT BOARD), MCU (MAIN CONTROL UNIT)
[A]: Cables
[A]
[B]: IOB ( x 8)
[C]: MCU ( x 5)
NOTE: When replacing the MCU, always [C]
reattach the three NVRAMs
(IC101, 108, 109) on the new
MCU.
⇒ IMPORTANT: Before performing Memory
Clear, be sure to write down the [B]
User Code and Counter data and
print out the SMC sheet.
⇒
IC101
NOTE: When replacing the NVRAM,
except for IC109 (B0109001: for IC108
counter), NVRAM service parts
are blank RAM (contain no data).
If these RAMs are installed as B010R950.WMF
they are in the B010, the machine IC109
will not function properly. Therefore after mounting the service part NVRAM
onto the MCU board, be sure to perform Memory Clear (SP5801), then re-
enter the UP/SP mode data manually.
SM 3-35 B010
Rev. 06/2004 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE
⇒ 3.11 MEMORY CLEAR PROCEDURE

IMPORTANT: Before performing Memory Clear, be sure to write down the User
Code and Counter data and print out the SMC sheet.
1. Inform the customer that you are about to perform a Memory Clear. Then,
make sure to write down the User Code and Counter data stored in Copier
Features/Key Operator Tools.
2. Print out the SMC Sheet (SP5990).
3. Make sure to write down the following SP data:
Replacement
4. Perform the actual Memory Clear (SP5801).
Adjustment
5. Input the UP/SP data written on the SMC printout.
and
NOTE: Values that have been changed from their defaults are shown in blue
with an asterisk (*).
6. Input the following UP/SP data:
3) SP5811: Serial Number
4) SP5907: Plug & Play
5) System Setting: Date/Time
7. Perform the following SP Modes:
3) SP3001-002: ID Sensor Initialization
SM 3-47 B010

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: MIDDLE GUIDE PLATE

GENERAL:
PARTS
The following has been changed due to parts standardization.
The following part update is being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs
REFERENCE
B0102572 Middle Guide Plate
1 0 41 25
B1882572 Guide Plate: Middle


APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: OPC DRUM BALANCER
GENERAL:
The part number and description for the OPC Drum Balancer has changed to parts standardization with

the B125. The following part update is being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs. Please update your parts
PARTS
catalog with the following information.
REFERENCE
B0102252 OPC Drum Balancer
2 0 51 12
B1252472 Balancer: OPC Drum
UNITS AFFECTED:

APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD

PARTS
GENERAL:
The following part information is being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs.

UPDATE 1: HDD – The manufacturer stopped making the old style hard disk drive.
Please update your parts catalog with the new information.
PLUS FIX
REFERENCE
A2955177 HDD: 40GB: ST340014A
2 0 69 11
B5145970 HDD: Hitachi: 40GB: Vancouver3
Copyright  2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. w w w . R i c o h U n i v e r s i t y. c o m Page 1 of 6

• UPDATE 2: Lower Spring Plate – Exit Roller – To minimize waves in film that has
a width of 420 mm or less, the shape of the spring plate has been
changed. Also the quantity was corrected from 16 to 4. Please update
your parts catalog with the new information.
#17 #27
#17 #27
REFERENCE
B0104454 B0104454 Lower Spring Plate – Exit Roller 16 → 4 59 17
1
- B1884454 Spring Plate: Exit Roller: Lower 4 59 21 *
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 duplicators listed below and manufactured after the serial numbers provided will have the new
Spring Plates installed during production.

Gestetner A070
Lanier LW410
J2040900001
RICOH Aficio 470W
SAVIN 4700WD
Page 2 of 6
• UPDATE 3: Gaskets – The material for the gaskets was changed to a more
environmentally friendly type. Please update your parts catalog with the
new information.
REFERENCE
B0101287 Rear gasket
2 0 11 22
B1881287 Gasket: Right Rear: Left Rear
B0101288 Seal – 5x463x2
1 0 11 37
B1881288 Gasket: Rear Middle
B0101290 Right Gasket – Front Rear
1 0 11 32
B1881290 Gasket: Right : Front Rear
B0101291 Front Gasket
2 0 11 11
B1881291 Gasket: Right Front: Left Front
B0101292 Left Lower Gasket
1 0 69 2
B1881292 Gasket: Left Lower
B0106166 Upper Stay Gasket
6 0 15 33
B1886166 Gasket: Stay: Upper
• UPDATE 4: DC Motor – The material for the DC motor was changed to a more
new information.
REFERENCE
B0106125 DC Motor – 7.2W
1 0 23 31
B0106122 Stepper Motor: Scanner: DC 7.2W
Page 3 of 6
• UPDATE 5: Casters – The material for the casters was changed to a more
new information.
REFERENCE
AH012016 Caster – G60
4 0 69 19
AH012031 Caster: 1470N
54001041 Leveling Foot
4 3/S 69 21
AA143547 Hexagonal Bolt: M12X80
AH013008 Leveling Foot Guide
4 3/S 69 20
B0231101 Leveling Foot
09545014B
B1886166 Flanged Hexagonal Head Bolt: 12 0 69 28 *
M5X14
Page 4 of 6
• UPDATE 6: Transfer Entrance Sheet – To increase the reliability of the transfer

entrance sheet the Mylar has been attached more accurately. Please
update your parts catalog with the new information.
REFERENCE
B0103854 Transfer Entrance Sheet
1 1 43 12
B0103853 Sheet: Entrance: Transfer
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B010 duplicators listed below and manufactured after the serial numbers provided will have the new
Transfer Entrance Sheet installed during production.

Gestetner A070
Lanier LW410
J20412xxxxx
RICOH Aficio 470W
SAVIN 4700WD
Page 5 of 6
• UPDATE 7: Toner Hopper Casing – The Toner Hopper Casing has been
standardized with the new model. Please update your parts catalog
with the new information.
REFERENCE
B0103092 B0103093 Toner Hopper casing 1 0 49 20
Page 6 of 6
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – A070
LANIER – LW410
SAVIN – 4700WD
SUBJECT: HARD DRIVE GASKETS
GENERAL:

The three hard drive gaskets were omitted from the parts catalog.
PARTS
The following part information is being issued for all B010 Parts Catalogs.
#27: B0105977
#26: B0105976
REFERENCE
NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
B0105976 Gasket: HDD 2 69 26*
B0105977 Gasket: HDD: 180 1 69 27*
Copyright  2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. w w w . R i c o h U n i v e r s i t y. c o m Page 1 of 1

Aficio 470W SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aficio 470W SM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aficio 470W SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B010

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2001 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.................................................... 1-1

2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 3-1

3.9 BOARDS .................................................................................................3-35

6 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................... 6-1

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)

Warning concerning copyright

Symbol What it means Lengthwise, SEF

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (59°F to 86°F)

1.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

1. Front: 1,000 mm (39")

1.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 0.15 mm/1000 mm (0.006”/39.4”) of level

1.1.4 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level: 120V, 60Hz

220 ~ 240V, 50/60Hz

NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

4. The recommended wall receptacle follows the NEMA Plug Configuration

NEMA 5-20 R NEMA 5-20 P

1.2 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [A] [D]

1.3 ROLL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

10. Install the harness clamp [A] and edging [B].

[B] [C] B010I551.WMF

1.4 HDD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the copier right and left rear covers ( x 9).

1.5 STAMP BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the copier rear left cover ( x 5).

1.6 ORIGINAL TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Snap the casters [A, B] onto the base frames [C].

1.7 I/F BOARD INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the following covers.

3. Install the I/F board unit [E] on

6. Remove the small covers [A, B] from

7. Install the following covers.

1.7.3 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

SP5997: Optional Counter Unit

SP5120: Mode Clear Option Counter Removal

2.2 LUBRICATION POINTS

[A]: Fusing Gears (Barrieta JFE 55/2)

2.2.2 DEVELOPMENT SECTION

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3.1 OPENING AND CLOSING THE MACHINE

[A]: Operation panel release

1. Remove the copier right and left rear covers ( x 9).

1. Remove the copier rear left cover ( x 5).

[A]: Right rear cover ( x 6) [F]: Right inner cover ( x 2)

[A]: Left original guide plate ( x 1)

[A]: Scanner stop switch ( x 2, x 1)

[A]: Door switch bracket ( x 1)

[A]: Original transport roller ( x 4)

[A]: Cleaning blade ( x 2) [A]

[A]: Lock plate ( x 2)

[A]: Guide plate ( x 2)

[A]: Grounding wire ( x1)